i?
Ba ee
Af
At: 8 phon
189-4 from TW ones
[v4
lJ
a
2
o
FE
z
z
<
artin
att
©\ dou a sie el ie ES)
VV S < OF roa) |
T.NELSON & SONS
LONDON, EDINBURGH & NEW YORK
MARTIN
MATILER
OR
A Boy’s Adventures in the Forests of Brazil
By
Robert Michacl Ballantyne
Author of ‘* The Dog Crusoe and his Master,†“The Young Fur-Traders,â€
“The Gorilla Hunters,†“ Ungava,â€
“ The Coral Island,â€
&e,
NEW EDITION
Zo NELSON AND SONS
LONDON + EDINBURGH
NEW YORK
1893
PREFACE.
My Dar younG READERS, in presenting this book to
you I have only to repeat what I have said in the
prefaces of my former works—namely, that all the
important points and anecdotes are true; only the
minor and unimportant ones being mingled with
fiction. With this single remark, I commit my work
to your hands, and wish you a pleasant ramble, in
spirit, through the romantic forests of Brazil.
Yours affectionately,
R. M. BALLANTYNE.
CONTENTS.
———- +44 +
CHAPTER I.
The hero and his only relative. ...c.cccc ccc ccc ccccecconsuceccersessvscssesescecseceesece 9
LM MASGTP OCG cee eee cece cence cee scececcecsscceseesstecesuetesecucesusactuseaucescecetevenecs 14
CHAPTER IV.
A lesson to all stocking-knitters—Martin’s prospects begin to open up...... 30
CHAPTER V.
Martin, being willing to go to sea, gocs to sea against his willie cece 37
CHAPTER VI.
The voyage—A pirate, chase, wreck, and CBCOME 0. oe eas sae iincsesensoresuceees sc 47
CHAPTER VII.
Martin and Barney get lost in a great forest, where they see strange and
Lr rele TRANS vce ee ee eeeccentseveecsecesccsevuessvstetetasssatecstsseseeseteseeses 54
CHAPTER VIII.
An enchanting land—An uncomfortable bed, and a queer breakfast—Many
surprises and a few frights, together with a notable AUSCOVETY 0. ccececeee 62
CHAPTER IX.
TRC REP E cieeeccceee ese sececcusvecesecsevsesatvateataceaseccueteeceecesceeeeece. 75
Vi CONTENTS.
CHAPTER X.
An enemy in the night—The vampire bat—The hermit discourses on
strange, and curious, cand trteresting Ehrngss... cece terete 81
CHAPTER XI.
The her nit’ s SLOT Yo evcceccccececee ence eee eee EEE 90
CHAPTER XII.
A hunting expedition, in which are scen stones that can run, and cows that
require no food—Besides @ desperate encounter with w jaguar, and
other Strange ENINGS...cecce cece cee cre ee ee 106
CHAPTER XIIL
Martin and Barney continue their travels, and see strange things—A mong
others, they see living jewels—They go to see « festa—They fight and run
LUWLY oe ccaccccnecenceececenseersetescesneessessaennaeens genes eget 123
CHAPTER XIV.
Cogitations and canocing on the Amazon—Barney’s exploit with an alliga-
tor—Stubborn facts—Remarkable mode Of SLCCPIUNG. ... cc ceevese renee eenees 137
CHAPTER XV.
The yreat anaconda’s dinner—Barney gets a fright—Turtles eggs—A. satis-
factory “blow outâ€â€”Senhor Antonio’s plantation—Preparations for a
GCE BAUM cae cee cece ee en ee Ee ee 150
CHAPTER XVI.
An alligator hunt—Remarkable explosions—The rainy season ushered in by
Cun, CW feel VESUNTECLLON eee ceceec creer tenet ee ee 162
CHAPTER XVII
The Gapo—Interruptions—Grampus and Marmoset—Canocing im the
woods—A night on a floating tsland.e...ceccccercsereereteertee ies 176
CHAPTER XVIII.
The sad and momentous eva referred to at the close of the chapter preceding
thee UUSbee cc cccccccceceeecececeeeeentenenscecsaenee sees seeeeea este eet Cee eEE EEE EEE THEE 186
CHAPTER XIX.
Worse and worse—Everything seems to go wrong LOG EEN .... se vserereesenees 195
CONTENTS. Vil
CHAPTER XX.
Martin reflects much, and forms a firm resolve—The Indian village ...... 204
CHAPTER XXI.
Savage feasts and ornaments—Martin grows desperate, and makes a bold
CULCMPE LO CSCO PE... eeeeeereetee rece eter ee treet te ete ee ccs tee tee etna eenen ites 213
CHAPTER XXII.
The escape—Alone in the wilderness—Fight between a jaguar and an aili-
gator—Martin encounters strange and terrible creatures ........cccceee 224
CHAPTER XXIII.
Martin meets with friends, and visits the diamond Mines .........c60 cesses 236
CHAPTER XXIV.
The diamond mines—Ifore and more astontshing fo. .ccccccccvecceeeeceneeseees 242
CHAPTER XXV.
New scenes and pleasant travelling i... c.cccccceccceecce nesses ee eee ees deseeeenereee 205
CHAPTER XXVI.
The Pturn...cecccccces Beebe pe es Pepe cess aoe enn er tee bee ae reser eiediag 276
CHAPTER XXVIL
Te OU GOP TE. ioc ceive v cece cee eet ee eee nek et eee cee cent ee daa ee aaa ese eereaecabeneees 283
COMAUSION ccc cede cece ccc cence ee ee eE EEE EEE REEL E EE EET EEL EEE ECE MEOH EO ESE 289
MARTIN RATTLER.
+
CHAPTER I.
The hero and his only relative.
ARTIN RATTLER was a very bad boy. At
least his aunt, Mrs. Dorothy Grumbit, said
so; and certainly she ought to have known, if any-
body should, for Martin lived with her, and was, as
she herself expressed it, “the bane of her existence,
the very torment of her life.†No doubt of it what-
ever, according to Aunt Dorothy Grumbit’s showing,
Martin Rattler was “a remarkably bad boy.â€
Ié is a curious fact, however, that although most
of the people in the village of Ashford seemed to
agree with Mrs. Grumbit in her opinion of Martin,
there were very few of them who did not smile
cheerfully on the child when they met him, and say,
“Good-day, lad,†as heartily as if they thought him
the best boy in the place. No one seemed to bear
10 MARTIN RATTLER.
Martin Rattler ill-will, notwithstanding his alleged
badness. Men laughed when they said he was a bad
boy, as if they did not quite believe their own asser-
tion, The vicar, an old white-headed man, with a
kind, hearty countenance, gaid that the child was full
of mischief—full of mischief; but he would improve
as he grew older, he was quite certain of that. And
the vicar was a good judge, for he had five boys of his
own, besides three other boys, the sons of a distant
relative, who boarded with hin ; and he had lived
forty years in a parish overflowing with boys, and he
was particularly fond of boys in general. Not so the
doctor, a pursy little man with a terrific frown, who
hated boys, especially little ones, with a very power-
ful hatred. The doctor said that Martin was a scamp.
And yet Martin had not the appearance of a
scamp. He had fat rosy cheeks, a round rosy mouth,.
a straight, delicately-formed nose, a firm, massive
chin, and a broad forehead. But the latter was
seldom visible, owing to the thickly-clustering fair
curls that overhung it. When asleep, Martin’s face
was the perfection of gentle innocence. But the
instant he opened his dark-brown eyes, a thousand
dimples and wrinkles played over his visage, chiefly
at the corners of his mouth and round his eyes, as
if the spirit of fun and the spirit of mischief had
MARTIN RATTLER. il
got entire possession of the boy, and were determined
to make the most of him. When deeply interested
in anything, Martin was as grave and serious as a
philosopher.
Aunt Dorothy Grumbit had a turned-up nose—
a very much turned-up nose; so much so, indeed,
that it presented a front view of the nostrils! It
was an ageravating nose, too, for the old lady’s
spectacles refused to rest on any part of it except
the extreme point. Mrs. Grumbit invariably placed
them on the right part of her. nose, and they as
invariably slid down the curved slope until they
were brought up by the little hillock at the end.
There they condescended to repose in peace.
Mrs. Grumbit was mild, and gentle, and _ little,
and thin, and old—perhaps seventy-five; but no
one knew her age for certain, not even herself. She
wore an old-fashioned, high-crowned cap, and a gown
of bed-curtain chintz, with flowers on it the size of
a saucer. It was a curious gown, and very cheap,
for Mrs. Grumbit was poor. No one knew the
extent of her poverty any more than they did her
age; but she herself knew it, and felt it deeply—
never so deeply, perhaps, as when her orphan nephew
Martin grew old enough to be put to school and she
had not wherewithal to send him. But love is quick-
12 MARTIN RATTLER.
witted and resolute. A residence of six years in
Germany had taught her to knit stockings at a rate
that cannot be described, neither conceived unless seen.
She knitted twe dozen pairs. The vicar took one
dozen, the doctor took the other. The fact soon
became known. Shops were not numerous in the
village in those days, and the wares they supplied
were only second-rate. Orders came pouring in;
Mrs. Grumbit’s knitting-wires clicked, and her little
old hands wagged with incomprehensible rapidity and
unflagging regularity; and Martin Rattler was sent
to school.
While occupied with her knitting she sat in a high-
backed chair in a very small deep window, through
which the sun streamed nearly the whole day, and
out of which there was the most charming imaginable
view of the gardens and orchards of the villagers,
with a little dancing brook in the midst, and the
green fields of the farmers beyond, studded with sheep
and cattle and knolls of woodland, and bounded in
the far distance by the bright blue sea. It was a
lovely scene, such an one as causes the eye to brighten
and the heart to melt as we gaze upon it and think,
perchance, of its Creator.
Yes, it was a scene worth looking at; but Mrs.
Grumbié never looked at it, for the simple reason that
MARTIN RATTLER. 13
she could not have seen it if she had. Half way
across her own little parlour was the extent of her
natural vision. By the aid of spectacles and a steady,
concentrated effort she could see the fireplace at the
other end of the room, and the portrait of her deceased
husband, who had been a sea-captain, and the white
kitten that usually sat on the rug before the fire. To
be sure she saw them very indistinctly. The picture
was a hazy blue patch, which was the captain’s coat ;
with a white patch down the middle of it, which was
his waistcoat; and a yellow ball on the top of it,
which was his head. Jt was rather an indistinct and
generalized view, no doubt, but she saw it, and that
was a great comfort.
CHAPTER It.
In disgrace.
IRE was the cause of Martin’s getting into dis-
E grace at school for the first time; and this is
how it happened.
“Go and poke the fire, Martin Rattler,†said the
schoolmaster, “and put on a bit of coal ; and see that
you don’t send the sparks flying about the floor.â€
Martin sprang with alacrity to obey, for he was
standing up with the class at the time, and was glad
of the temporary relaxation. He stirred the fire with
great care, and put on several pieces of coal very
slowly, and rearranged them two or three times,
after which he stirred the fire a little more, and
examined it carefully to see that it was all right.
But he did not seem quite satisfied, and was proceeding
to readjust the coals when Bob Croaker, one of the
big boys, who was a bullying, ill-tempered fellow, and
had a spite against Martin, called out,—
“ Please, sir, Rattler’s playin’ at the fire.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 15
“Come back to your place, sir!†cried the master
sternly.
Martin returned in haste, and resumed his position
in the class. As he did so he observed that his fore-
finger was covered with soot. Immediately a smile
of glee overspread his features, and while the master
was busy with one of the boys, he drew his black
finger gently down the forehead and nose of the boy
next to him.
“What part of the earth was peopled by the
descendants of Ham?†cried the master, pointing to
the dux.
“Shem,†shrieked a small boy near the foot of the
class.
“Silence!†thundered the master, with a frown
that caused the small boy to quake down to the
points of his toes,
“ Asia,†answered dux.
“Next ?â€
“ Turkey.â€
“Next, next, next? Hallo! John Ward,†cried
the master, starting up in anger from his seat, “ what
do you mean by that, sir?"
“What, sir?†said John Ward, tremulously, while
& suppressed titter ran round the class,
“Your face, sir! Who blacked your face, eh?â€
; y
16 MARTIN RATTLER.
“[T—I—don’t know,†said the boy, drawing his
sleeve across his face, which had the effect of covering
it with sooty streaks.
An uncontrollable shout of laughter burst from the
whole school, which was instantly followed by a
silence so awful and profound that a pin might have
been heard to fall.
“Martin Rattler, you did that! JI know you did;
I see the marks on your fingers. Come here, sir!
Now tell me, did you do it?â€
Martin Rattler never told falsehoods. His old
aunt had laboured to impress upon him from infancy
that to lie was to commit a sin which is abhorred by
God and scorned by man, and her teaching had not
been in vain. The child would have suffered any
punishment rather than have told a deliberate lie.
He looked straight in the master’s face, and said,
“Yes, sir, I did it.â€
“Very well, go to your seat, and remain in school
during the play-hour.â€
With a heavy heart Martin obeyed, and soon after
the school was dismissed.
“I say, Rattler,†whispered Bob Croaker, as he
passed, “I’m going to teach your white kitten to swim
just now. Won't you come and see it?â€
The malicious laugh with which the boy accom-
MARTIN RATTLER. VW
panied this remark convinced Martin that he intended
to put his threat in execution. For a moment he
thought of rushing out after him to protect his pet
kitten; but a glance at the stern brow of the master,
as he sat at his desk reading, restrained him, so, crush-
ing down his feelings of mingled fear and anger, he
endeavoured to while away the time by watching the
boys as they played in the fields before the windows
of the school
CHAPTER III.
The great fight.
“ \ | ARTIN!†said the schoolmaster, in a severe
tone, looking up from the book with which
he was engaged, “don’t look out at the window, sir;
turn your back to it.â€
“Please, sir, I can’t help it,†replied the boy,
trembling with eagerness as he stared across the
o
fields.
1?
“Turn your back on it, I say!†reiterated the
master in a loud tone, at the same time striking the
desk violently with his cane.
“QO sir, let me out! There’s Bob Croaker with
my kitten. He’s going to drown it. I know he is—
he said he would; and if he does, aunty will die, for
she loves it next to me. And I must save it; and—
and if you don’t let me out—youll be a murderer !â€
At this concluding burst, Martin sprang forward
and stood before his master with clinched fists and
a face blazing with excitement. The schoolmaster’s
gaze of astonishment gradually gave place to a dark
MARTIN RATTLER. 19
frown strangely mingled with a smile, and, when the
boy concluded, he said quietly, “ You may go.â€
No second bidding was needed. The door flew
open with a bang, and the gravel of the playground,
spurned right and left, dashed against the window
panes as Martin flew across it. The paling that
fenced it off from the fields below was low, but too
high for a jump. Never a boy in all the school had
crossed that paling at a spring without laying his
hands upon it, but Martin did. We do not mean to
say that he did anything superhuman; but he rushed
at it like a charge of cavalry, sprang from the ground
like a deer, kicked away the top bar, tumbled com-
pletely over, landed on his head, and rolled down the
slope on the other side as fast as he could have run
down—perhaps faster.
It would have required sharper eyes than yours
or mine to have observed how Martin got on hig legs
again; but he did it in a twinkling, and was half
across the field almost before you could wink, and
panting on the heels of Bob Croaker. Bob saw him
coming, and instantly started off at a hard run, fol-
lowed by the whole school. A few minutes brought
them to the banks of the stream, where Bob Croaker
halted, and, turning round, held the white kitten up
by the nape of the neck.
20 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Oh, spare it! spare it, Bob !—don’t do it—please
don’t, don’t do it!†gasped Martin, as he strove in
vain to run faster.
“There you go!†shouted Bob, with a coarse laugh,
sending the kitten high into the air, whence it fell
with a loud splash into the water.
Tt was a dreadful shock to feline nerves, no doubt,
but that white kitten was no ordinary animal. Its
little heart beat bravely when it rose to the surface,
and before its young master came up it had regained
the bank. But, alas! what a change! It went into
the stream a fat, round, comfortable ball of eider-
down; it came out—a scraggy blotch of white paint,
with its black eyes glaring like two great glass beads!
No sooner did it crawl out of the water than Bob
Croaker seized it, and whirled it round his head, amid
suppressed cries of “Shame!†intending to throw it
in again; but at that instant Martin Rattler seized
Bob by the collar of his coat with both hands, and
letting himself drop suddenly, dragged the cruel boy to
the ground, while the kitten crept humbly away and
hid itself in a thick tuft of grass.
A moment sufficed to enable Bob Croaker, who
was nearly twice Martin’s weight, to free himself
from the grasp of his panting antagonist, whom he
threw on his back, and doubled his fist, intending to
MARTIN RATTLER. 21
strike Martin on the face; but a general rush of the
boys prevented this.
“Shame, shame! fair play!†cried several; “don’t
hit him when he’s down !â€
“Then let him rise up and come on!†cried Bob
fiercely, as he sprang up and released Martin.
“Ay, that’s fair. Now then, Martin, remember
the kitten.â€
“Strike men of your own size!†cried several of
the bigger boys, as they interposed to prevent Martin
from rushing into the unequal contest.
“So I will,†cried Bob Croaker, glaring round with
passion. “Come on, any of you that likes. I don’t
care a button for the biggest of you.â€
No one accepted this challenge, for Bob was the
oldest and the strongest boy in the school, although,
as is usually the case with bullies, by no means the
bravest.
Seeing that no one intended to fight with him, and
that a crowd of boys strove to hold Martin Rattler
back, while they assured him that he had not the
smallest chance in the world, Bob turned towards the
kitten, which was quietly and busily employed in
licking itself dry, and said, “Now, Martin, you
coward, I'll give it another swim for your impu-
dence.†,
22 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Stop, stop!†cried Martin earnestly. “Bob
Croaker, I would rather do anything than fight. I
would give you everything I have to save my kitten;
but if you won’t spare it unless I fight, Pll do it.
If you throw it in before you fight me, you’re the
greatest coward that ever walked. Just give me
five minutes to breathe, and a drink of water, and
I'll fight you as long as I can stand.â€
Bob looked at his little foe in surprise. “Well,
that’s fair. Tm your man; but if you don’t lick
me, I'l drown the kitten, that’s all.†Having said
this, he quietly divested himself of his jacket and
neckcloth, while several boys assisted Martin to do
the same, and brought him a draught of water in the
crown of one of their caps. In five minutes all was
ready, and the two boys stood face to face and foot
to foot, with their fists doubled, and revolving, and
a ring of boys around them.
Just at this critical moment the kitten, having
found the process of licking itself dry more fatiguing
than it had expected, gave vent to a faint mew of
distress. It was all that was wanting to set Martin’s
indignant heart into a blaze of inexpressible fury.
Bob Croaker’s visage instantly received a shower of
sharp, stinging blows, that had the double effect of
taking that youth by surprise and throwing him
MARTIN RATTLER. 23
down upon the greensward. But Martin could not
hope to do this a second time. Bob now knew the
vigour of his assailant, and braced himself warily to
the combat, commencing operations by giving Martin
a tremendous blow on the point of his nose, and an-
other on the chest. These had the effect of tempering
Martin’s rage with a salutary degree of caution, and
of eliciting from the spectators sundry cries of warn-
ing on the one hand, and admiration on the other,
while the young champions revolved warily round
each other, and panted vehemently.
- The battle that was fought that day was one of
a thousand. It created as great a sensation in the
village school as did the battle of Waterloo in En-
gland. It was a notable fight, such as had not taken
place within the memory of the oldest boy in the
village, and from which, in after years, events of
Juvenile history were dated — especially pugilistic
events, of which, when a good one came off, it used
to be said that “such a battle had not taken place
since the year of the Great Fight.†Bob Croaker
was a noted fighter. Martin Rattler was, up to this
date, an untried hero, Although fond of rough play
and boisterous mischief, he had an unconquerable
aversion to earnest fighting, and very rarely indeed
returned home with a black eye—much to the satis-
24 MARTIN RATTLER.
faction of Aunt Dorothy Grumbit, who objected to all
fighting from principle, and frequently asserted, in
gentle tones, that there should be no soldiers or
sailors (fighting sailors, she meant) at all, but that
people ought all to settle everything the best way
they could without fighting, and live peaceably with
one another, as the Bible told them to do. They
would be far happier and better off, she was sure of
that; and if everybody was of her way of thinking,
there would be neither swords, nor guns, nor pistols,
nor squibs, nor anything else at all! Dear old lady !
It would indeed be a blessing if her principles could
be carried out in this warring and jarring world.
But as this is rather difficult, what we ought to be
careful about is, that we never fight except in a good
cause and with a clear conscience.
It was well for Martin Rattler, on that great day,
that the formation of the ground favoured him. The
spot on which the fight took place was uneven, and
covered with little hillocks and hollows, over which
Bob Croaker stumbled and into which he fell—being
a clumsy boy on his legs—and did himself consider-
able damage; while Martin, who was firmly knit and
active as a kitten, scarcely ever fell, or, if he did,
sprang up again like an indiarubber ball. Fair play
was embedded deep in the centre of Martin’s heart,
MARTIN RATTLER, 25
so that he scorned to hit his adversary when he was
down. or in the act of rising ; but the thought of the
fate that awaited the white kitten if he were con-
quered acted like lightning in his veins, and scarcely
had Bob time to double his fists after a fall, when he
was knocked back again into the hollow out of which
he had risen, There were no rownds in this fight—
no pausing to recover breath. Martin’s anger rose
with every blow, whether given or received; and
although he was knocked down flat four or five times,
he rose again, and, without a second’s delay, rushed
headlong at his enemy. Feeling that he was too
little and light to make much impression on Bob
Croaker by means of mere blows, he endeavoured as
much as possible to throw his weight against him at
each assault; but Bob stood his ground well, and
after a time seemed even to be recovering strength
a, little,
Suddenly he made a rush at Martin, and, dealing
him a successful blow on the forehead, knocked him
down; at the same time he himself tripped over a
mole-hill and fell upon his face. Both were on their
legs in an instant. Martin grew desperate. The
white kitten swimming for its life seemed to rise
before him, and new energy was infused into his
frame, He retreated a step or two, and then darted
26 MARTIN RATTLER.
forward like an arrow from a bow. Uttering a loud
ery, he sprang completely in the air and plunged—
head and fists together, as if he were taking a dive—
into Bob Croaker’s bosom! The effect was tremen-
dous. Bob went down like a shock of grain before
the sickle ; and having, in their prolonged movements,
approached close to the brink of the stream, both he
and Martin went with a sounding splash into the
deep pool and disappeared. It was but for a moment,
however. Martin’s head emerged first, with eyes and
mouth distended to the utmost. Instantly, on finding
bottom, he turned to deal his opponent another blow ;
but it was not needed. When Bob Croaker’s head
rose to the surface there was no motion in the features,
and the eyes were. closed. The intended blow was
changed into a friendly grasp, and exerting himself
to the utmost, Martin dragged his insensible school-
fellow to the bank, where, in a few minutes, he
recovered sufficiently to declare in a sulky tone that
he would fight no more.
“Bob Croaker,†said Martin, holding out his hand,
“T’m sorry we've had to fight. JI wouldn’t have done
it but to save my kitten. You compelled me to do
it, you know that. Come, let’s be friends again.â€
Bob made no reply, but slowly and with some
difficulty put on his vest and jacket.
MARTIN RATTLER. 27
“I’m sure,†continued Martin, “there’s no reason
in bearing me ill-will. I’ve done nothing unfair, and
I'm very sorry we've had to fight. Won’t you shake
hands ?â€
Bob was silent.
“Come, come, Bob!†eried several of the bigger
boys, “don’t be sulky, man; shake hands and be
friends. Martin has licked you this time, and
youll lick him next time, no doubt, and that’s all
about it.â€
“Arrah, then, ye’re out there intirely. Bob
Croaker’ll niver lick Martin Rattler, though he wos
to live to the age of the great M‘Thuselah,†said a
deep-toned voice close to the spot where the fight had
taken place.
All eyes were instantly turned in the direction
whence it proceeded, and the boys now became aware,
for the first time, that the combat had been witnessed
by a sailor, who, with a smile of approval beaming on
his good-humoured countenance, sat under the shade of
a neighbouring tree smoking a pipe of that excessive
shortness and blackness that seems to be peculiarly
beloved by Ivishmen in the humbler ranks of life,
The man was very tall and broad-shouldered, and
carried himself with a free-and-casy swagger, as he
rose and approached the group of boys.
28 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Hell niver bate ye, Martin, avic, as long as
there’s two timbers of ye houldin’ togither.†The
seaman patted Martin on the head as he spoke; and,
turning to Bob Croaker, continued: “Ye ought to be
proud, ye spalpeen, o’ bein’ wopped by sich a young
hero as this. Come here and shake hands with him;
d’ye hear? Troth, an’ it’s besmearin’ ye with too
much honour that same. There, that’ll do. Don’t say
yee sorry now, for it’s lies ye’d be tellin’ if ye did.
Come along, Martin, an’ I'll convarse with ye as ye
go home. Ye'll be a man yet, as sure as my name is
Barney O’Flannagan.â€
Martin took the white kitten in his arms and
thrust its wet little body into his equally wet bosom,
where the warmth began soon to exercise a soothing
influence on the kitten’s depressed spirits, so that, ere
long, it began to purr. He then walked with the
sailor towards the village, with his face black and
blue, and swelled and covered with blood, while
Bob Croaker and his companions returned to the
school.
The distance to Martin’s residence was not great,
but it was sufficient to enable the voluble Irishman
to recount a series of the most wonderful adventures
and stories of foreign lands that set Martin’s heart on
fire with desire to go to sea—a desire which was by
MARTIN RATTLER. 29
no means new to him, and which recurred violently
every time he paid a visit to the small sea-port of
Bilton, which lay about five miles to the southward
of his native village. Moreover, Barney suggested
that it was time Martin should be doing for himself
(he was now ten years old), and said that if he would
join his ship he could get him a berth, for he was
much’ in want of an active lad to help him with the
coppers. But Martin Rattler sighed deeply, and said
that, although his heart was set upon going to sea, he
did not see how it was to be managed, for his aunt
would not let him go.
Before they separated, however, it was arranged
that Martin should pay the sailor's ship a visit, when
he would hear a good deal more about foreign lands;
and that, in the meantime, he should make another
attempt to induce Aunt Dorothy Grumbit to give her
consent to his going to sea.
CHAPTER IV.
A lesson to all stocking-knitters—Martin’s prospects begun to open up.
N the small sea-port of Bilton, before mentioned,
there dwelt an old and wealthy merchant and
ship-owner, who devoted a small portion of his time
to business, and a very large portion of it to what
is usually termed “doing good.†This old gentleman
was short, and stout, and rosy, and bald, and active,
and sharp as a needle.
In the short time that Mr, Arthur Jollyboy devoted
to business, he accomplished as much as most men do
in the course of a long day. There was not a be-
nevolent society in the town of which Arthur Jolly-
boy, Esquire, of the Old Hulk (as he styled his
cottage), was not a member, director, secretary, and
treasurer, all in one, and all at once! If it had been
possible for man to be ubiquitous, Mr. Jollyboy would
have been so naturally , or, if not naturally, he would
have made himself so by force of will. Yet he made
no talk about it. His step was quiet, though quick ;
MARTIN RATTLER. 31
and his voice was gentle, though rapid; and he
was chiefly famous for talking little and doing
rouch,
Some time after the opening of our tale, Mr. Jolly-
boy had received information of Mrs. Grumbit’s stock-
ing movement. That same afternoon he put on his
broad-brimmed white hat, and walking out to the
village in which she lived, called upon the vicar, who
was a particular and intimate friend of his. Having
ascertained from the vicar that Mrs. Grumbit would
not accept of charity, he said abruptly,—
“ And why not—is she too proud ?â€
“By no means,†replied the vicar. “She says
that she would think shame to take money from
friends as long as she can work, because every penny
that she would thus get would be so much less to go
to the helpless poor, of whom, she says, with much
truth, there are enough and to spare. And I quite
agree with her as regards her principle; but it does
not apply fully to her, for she cannot work so as to
procure a sufficient livelihood without injury to her
health.â€
“Is she clever?†inquired Mr. Jollyboy.
“Why, no, not particularly. In fact, she does not
often exert her reasoning faculties, except in the com-
monplace matters of ordinary and everyday routine.â€
32 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Then she’s cleverer than most people,†said Mr.
Jollyboy, shortly. “Is she obstinate ?â€
“No, not in the least,†returned the vicar with a
puzzled smile.
“ Ah, well, good-bye, good-bye; that’s all I want
to know.â€
Mr. Jollyboy rose, and hurrying through the vil-
lage tapped at the cottage door, and was soon closeted
with Mrs. Dorothy Grumbit. In the course of half-
an-hour, Mr. Jollyboy drew from Mrs. Grumbit as
much about her private affairs as he could, without
appearing rude. But he found the old lady very
close and sensitive on that point. Not so, however,
when he got her upon the subject of her nephew.
She had enough, and more than enough, to say about
him. It is true she began by remarking sadly that
he was a very bad boy; but as she continued to
talk about him, she somehow or other gave her
visitor the impression that he was a very good boy!
They had a wonderfully long and confidential tall
about Martin, during which Mr. Jollyboy struck Mrs.
Grumbit nearly dumb with horror by stating pos-
itively that he would do for the boy—he would
“send him to sea! Then, seeing that he had hit the
wrongest possible nail on the head, he said that he
would make the lad a clerk in his office, where he
MARTIN RATTLER. 33
would be sure to rise to a place of trust; whereat
Mrs. Grumbit danced, if we may so speak, into her-
self for joy.
“ And now, ma’am, about these stockings. I want
two thousand pairs as soon as I can get them !â€
“Sir?†said Mrs, Grumbit.
“Of course, not for my own use, ma'am; nor for
the use of my family, for I have no family, and if I
had, that would be an unnecessarily large supply.
The fact is, Mrs. Grumbit, I am a merchant, and I
send very large supplies of home-made articles to
foreign lands, and two thousand pairs of socks are a
mere driblet. Of course I do not expect you to
make them all for me, but I wish you to make as
many pairs as you can.â€
“I shall be very happy—†began Mrs, Grumbit,
“But, Mrs. Grumbit, there is a peculiar formation
which I require in my socks that will give you extra
trouble, I fear; but I must have it, whatever the
additional expense may be. What is your charge
for the pair you are now making ?â€
“Three shillings,†said Mrs. Grumbit,
“Ah! very good. Now, take up the wires, if you
please, ma’am, and do what I tell you. Now, drop
that stitch—good; and take up this one—capital ;
and pull this one across that way—so; and that
2
oO
34, MARTIN RATTLER.
one across this way—exactly. Now, what is the
result ?â€
The result was a complicated knot; and Mrs.
Grumbit, after staring a few seconds at the old
gentleman in surprise, said so, and begged to know
what use it was of.
“Oh, never mind, never mind. We merchants
have strange fancies, and foreigners have curious
tastes now and then. Please to make all my socks
with a hitch like that in them all round, just above
the ankle. It will form an ornamental ring. Tm
sorry to put you to the trouble, but of course I pay
extra for fancy-work. Will six shillings a pair do
for these ?â€
“My dear sir,†said Mrs. Grumbit, “it is no ad-
ditional—â€
“Well, well, never mind,†said Mr. Jollyboy.
“Two thousand pairs, remember, as soon as pos-
sible— close knitted, plain stitch, rather coarse
worsted; and don’t forget the hitch, Mrs. Grumbit,
don’t forget the hitch.â€
Ah! reader, there are many Mrs. Grumbits in
this world requiring hitches to be made in their
stockings !
At this moment the door burst open. Mrs. Doro-
thy Grumbit uttered a piercing scream, Mr. Jollyboy
MARTIN RATTLER. 35
dropped his spectacles and sat down on his hat, and
Martin Rattler stood before them with the white
kitten in his arms.
For a few seconds there was a dead silence, while
an expression of puzzled disappointment passed over
Mr. Jollyboy’s ruddy countenance. At last he said,—
“Is this, madam, the nephew who, you told me a
little ago, is not addicted to fighting ?â€
“Yes,†answered the old lady faintly, and cover-
ing her eyes with her hands, “ that is Martin.â€
“Tf my aunt told you that, sir, she told you the
truth,†said Martin, setting down the blood-stained
white kitten, which forthwith began to stretch its
limbs and lick itself dry. “I don’t ever fight if I
can help it, but I couldn’t help it to-day.â€
With a great deal of energy, and a revival of
much of his former indignation when he spoke of
the kitten’s sufferings, Martin recounted all the cir-
cumstances of the fight; during the recital of which
Mrs. Dorothy Grumbit took his hand in hers and
patted it, gazing the while into his swelled visage,
and weeping plentifully, but very silently. When
he had finished, Mr. Jollyboy shook hands with him,
and said he was a trump, at the same time recom-
mending him to go and wash his face. Then he
whispered a few words in Mrs. Grumbit’s ear, which
36 MARTIN RATTLER.
seemed to give that excellent lady much pleasure ;
after which he endeavoured to straighten his crushed
hat, in which attempt he failed; took his leave, and
promised to call again very soon, and went back to
the Old Hulk—chuckling.
CHAPTER V.
Martin, being willing to yo to sea, goes to sea against his will.
OUR years rolled away, casting chequered light
iz and shadow over the little village of Ashford
in their silent passage—whitening the forelocks of
the aged, and strengthening the muscles of the young.
Death, too, touched a hearth here and there, and
carried desolation to a home; for four years cannot
wing their flight without enforcing on us the lesson
—which we are so often taught, and yet take so
long to learn—that this is not our rest, that here
we have no abiding city. Did we but ponder this
lesson more frequently and earnestly, instead of mak-
ing us sad, it would nerve our hearts and hands to
fight and work more diligently—to work in the cause
of our Redeemer—the only cause that is worth the
life-long energy of immortal beings—the great cause
that includes all others; and it would teach us to
remember that our little day of opportunity will soon
be spent, and that the night is at hand in which no
man can work,
38 MARTIN RATTLER.
Four years rolled away, and during this time Mar-
tin, having failed to obtain his aunt’s consent to his
going to sea, continued at school, doing his best to
curb the roving spirit that strove within him. Mar-
tin was not particularly bright at the dead languages ;
to the rules of grammar he entertained a rooted aver-
sion; and at history he was inclined to yawn, except
when it happened to touch upon the names and deeds
of such men as Vasco di Gama and Columbus. But
in geography he was perfect; and in arithmetic and
book-keeping he was quite a proficient, to the delight
of Mrs. Dorothy Grumbit, whose household books he
summed up, and to the satisfaction of his fast friend,
Mr. Arthur Jollyboy, whose ledgers he was—in that
old gentleman’s secret resolves—destined to keep.
Martin was now fourteen, broad and strong, and
tall for his age. He was the idol of the school—
dashing, daring, reckless, and good-natured. There
was almost nothing that he would not attempt, and
there were very few things that he could not do.
He never fought, however—from principle; and his
strength and size often saved him from the necessity.
But he often prevented other boys from fighting, ex-
cept when he thought there was good reason for it;
then he stood by and saw fair play. There was a
strange mixture of philosophical gravity, too, in Mar-
MARTIN RATTLER. 39
tin. As he grew older he became more enthusiastic
and less boisterous.
Bob Croaker was still at the school, and was, from
prudential motives, a fast friend of Martin. But he
bore him a secret grudge, for he could not forget the
great fight.
One day Bob took Martin by the arm and said,
“T say, Rattler, come with me to Bilton and have
some fun among the shipping.â€
“Well, I don’t mind if I do,†said Martin. “Tm
just in the mood for a ramble, and I’m not expected
home till bed-time.â€
In little more than an hour the two boys were
wandering about the dockyards of the sea-port town,
and deeply engaged in examining the complicated
rigging of the ships. While thus occupied, the clank-
ing of a windlass and the merry, “Yo heave ho!
and away she goes,†of the sailors, attracted their
attention.
“Hallo! there goes the Firefly, bound for the
South Seas,†cried Bob Croaker; “come, let’s see
her start. I say, Martin, isn’t your friend, Barney
O’Flannagan, on board ?â€
“Yes, he is. He tries to get me to go out every
voyage, and J wish I could. Come quickly; I want
to say good-bye to him before he starts.â€
40 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Why don’t you run away, Rattler?†inquired
Bob, as they hurried round the docks to where the
vessel was warping out.
“ Because I don’t need to. My aunt has given
me leave to go if I like; but she says it would break
her heart if I do, and I would rather be screwed
down to a desk for ever than do that, Bob Croaker.â€
The vessel, upon the deck of which the two boys
now leaped, was a large, heavy-built barque. Her
sails were hanging loose, and the captain was giving
orders to the men, who had their attention divided
between their duties on board and their mothers,
wives, and sisters, who still lingered to take a last
farewell.
“Now, then, those who don’t want to go to sea
had better go ashore,†roared the captain.
There was an immediate rush to the side.
“T say, Martin,’ whispered Barney, as he hurried
past, “jump down below for’ard; you can go out 0’
the harbour mouth with us, and get ashore in one 0’
the shore-boats alongside. They'll not cast off till
we're well out. I want to speak to you—â€
“Man the fore-top-sail halyards,†shouted the first
mate.
“Ay, ay, sir-r-r!†and the men sprang to obey.
Just then the ship touched on the bar at the mouth
MARTIN RATTLER. 41
of the harbour, and in another moment she was
aground.
“There, now, she’s hard and fast!†roared the cap-
tain, as he stormed about the deck in a paroxysm of
rage. But man’s rage could avail nothing. They
had missed the passage by a few feet, and now they
had to wait the fall and rise again of the tide ere
they could hope to get off.
In the confusion that followed, Bob Croaker sug-
gested that Martin and he should take one of the
punts, or small boats, which hovered round the vessel,
and put out to sea, where they might spend the day
pleasantly in rowing and fishing.
“Capital!†exclaimed Martin. “Let’s go at once.
Yonder’s a little fellow who will let us have his punt
for a few pence. I know him.—Hallo, Tom !â€
“Ay, ay,†squeaked a boy, who was so small that
he could scarcely lift the oar, light though it was,
with which he sculled his punt cleverly along.
“Shove alongside, like a good fellow; we want
your boat for a little to row out a bit.â€
“It’s a-blowin’ too hard,†squeaked the small boy,
as he ranged alongside. “I’m afeard you'll be
blowed out.â€
“ Nonsense!†cried Bob Croaker, grasping the rope
which the boy threw to him, “Jump on board,
42 MARTIN RATTLER.
younker; we don’t want you to help us, and you're
too heavy for ballast. Slip down the side, Martin,
and get in while I hold on to the rope. All right?
Now I'l follow. Here, shrimp, hold the rope till ’m
in, and then cast off. Look alive!â€
As Bob spoke, he handed the rope to the little
boy, but in doing so let it accidentally slip out of
his hand.
“ Catch hold o’ the main chains, Martin—quick !â€
But Martin was too late. The current that swept
out of the harbour whirled the light punt away from
the ship’s side and carried it out seaward. Martin
instantly sprang to the oar, and turned the boat’s
head round. He was a stout and expert rower, and
would soon have regained the ship; but the wind
increased at the moment, and blew in a squall off
shore, which carried him farther out despite his ut-
most efforts. Seeing that all further attempts were
useless, Martin stood up and waved his hand to Bob
Croaker, shouting as he did so, “ Never mind, Bob,
Tl make for the South Point. Run round and meet
me, and we'll row back together.â€
The South Point was a low cape of land which
stretched a considerable distance out to sea, about
three miles to the southward of Bilton harbour. It
formed a large bay, across which, in ordinary weather,
MARTIN RATTLER. 43
a small boat might be rowed in safety. Martin Rat-
tler was well known at the sea-port as a strong and
fearless boy, so that no apprehension was entertained
for his safety by those who saw him blown away.
Bob Croaker immediately started for the Point on
foot, a distance of about four miles by land; and the
crew of the Firefly were so busied with their stranded
vessel that they took no notice of the doings of
the boys.
But the weather now became more and more stormy.
Thick clouds gathered on the horizon. The wind
began to blow with steady violence, and shifted a
couple of points to the southward, so that Martin
found it impossible to keep straight for the Point.
Still he worked perseveringly at his single oar, and
sculled rapidly over the sea; but as he approached
the Point, he soon perceived that no effort of which
he was capable could enable him to gain it. But
Martin’s heart was stout. He strove with all the
energy of hope until the Point was passed; and then,
turning the head of his little boat towards it, he
strove with all the energy of despair, until he fell
down exhausted. The wind and tide swept him
rapidly out to sea, and when his terrified comrade
reached the Point, the little boat was but a speck on
the seaward horizon.
44, MARTIN RATTLER.
Well was it then for Martin Rattler that a friendly
heart beat for him on board the Firefly. Bob Croaker
carried the news to the town, but no one was found
daring enough to risk his life out in a boat on that
stormy evening. The little punt had been long out
of sight ere the news reached them, and the wind
had increased to a gale. But Barney O’Flannagan
questioned Bob Croaker closely, and took particular
note of the point of the compass at which Martin
had disappeared ; and when the Firefly at length got
under way, he climbed to the fore-top cross-trees, and
stood there scanning the horizon with an anxious
eye.
It was getting dark, and a feeling of despair began
to ereep over the seaman’s heart as he gazed round
the wide expanse of water, on which nothing was to
be seen except the white foam that crested the rising
billows.
“ Starboard, hard!†he shouted suddenly.
“ Starboard it is!†replied the man at the wheel,
with prompt obedience.
In another moment Barney slid down the back-
stay and stood on the deck, while the ship rounded
to, and narrowly missed striking a small boat that
floated keel wp on the water. There was no cry
from the boat; and it might have been passed as a
MARTIN RATTLER. 45
mere wreck, had not the lynx-eye of Barney noticed
a dark object clinging to it.
“Lower away a boat, lads,†cried the Irishman,
springing overboard, and the words had _ scarcely
passed his lips when the water closed over his head.
The Firefly was hove to, a boat was lowered and
rowed towards Barney, whose strong voice guided his
shipmates towards him. In less than a quarter of an
hour the bold sailor and his young friend Martin
Rattler were safe on board, and the ship’s head was
again turned out to sea.
It was full half-an-hour before Martin was re-
stored to consciousness in the forecastle, to which his
deliverer had conveyed him.
“ Musha, lad, but ye’re booked for the blue wather
now, an’ no mistake!†said Barney, looking with an
expression of deep sympathy at the poor boy, who
sat staring before him quite speechless. “The cap-
ting “ll not let ye out o’ this ship till ye git to the
Gould Coast, or some sich place. He couldn’t turn
back av he wanted iver so much: but he doesn’t
want to, for he needs a smart lad like you, an’ he'll
keep you now, for sartin.â€
Barney sat down by Martin’s side and stroked his
fair curls, as he sought in his own quaint fashion to
console him. But in vain. Martin grew quite des-
46 MARTIN RATTLER.
perate as he thought of the misery into which poor
Aunt Dorothy Grumbit would be plunged, on learning
that he had been swept out to sea in a little boat,
and drowned, as she would naturally suppose. In
his frenzy he entreated and implored the captain to
send him back in the boat, and even threatened to
knock out his brains with a handspike if he did not;
but the captain smiled, and told him that it was his
own fault. He had no business to be putting to sea
in a small boat in rough weather; and he might be
thankful he wasn’t drowned. He wouldn’t turn back
now for fifty pounds twice told.
At length Martin became convinced that all hope
of returning home was gone. He went quietly be-
low, threw himself into one of the sailors’ berths,
turned his face to the wall, and wept long and
bitterly.
CHAPTER VI.
The voyage—A pirate, chase, ‘wreek, and escape.
IME reconciles a man to almost anything. In
[ the course of time Martin Rattler became re-
conciled to his fate, and went about the ordinary
duties of a cabin-boy on board the Firefly just as if
he had been appointed to that office in the ordinary
way—with the consent of the owners and by the
advice of his friends. The captain, Skinflint by
name, and as surly an old fellow as ever walked a
quarter-deck, agreed to pay him wages “if he behaved
well.†The steward, under whose immediate authority
he was placed, turned out to be a hearty, good-
natured young fellow, and was very kind to him.
But Martin’s great friend was Barney O’Flannagan,
the cook, with whom he spent many an hour in the
night watches, talking over plans, and prospects, and
retrospects, and foreign lands.
As Martin had no clothes except those on his back,
which fortunately happened to be new and good,
48 MARTIN RATTLER.
Barney gave him a couple of blue striped shirts, and
made him a jacket, pantaloons, and slippers of canvas ;
and, what was of much greater importance, taught
him how to make and mend the same for him-
self.
“Ye see, Martin, lad,†he said, while thus employed
one day, many weeks after leaving port, “ it’s a great
thing, intirely, to be able to help yerself. For my
part, I niver travel without my work-box in my
pocket.â€
“ Your work-box!†said Martin, laughing.
“Jist so. An’ it consists of wan sailmaker’s
needle, a ball o’ twine, and a clasp-knife. Set me
down with these before a roll o’ canvas and Ill
make ye a’most anything.â€
“You seem to have a turn for everything, Barney,â€
said Martin. “How came you to be a cook?â€
“That's move nor I can tell ye, lad. As far as I
remimber, I began with murphies, when I was two
foot high, in my father’s cabin in ould Ireland. But
that was on my own account intirely, and not as a
purfession ; and a sorrowful time I had of it, too, for
I was for iver burnin’ my fingers promiskiously, and
fallin’ into the fire ivery day more or less—â€
“Stand by to hoist top-gallant-sails !†shouted the
captain. “ How’s her head?â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 49
“South and by east, sir,’ answered the man at the
wheel.
“Keep her away two points, Look alive, lads.
Hand me the glass, Martin.â€
The ship was close-hauled when these abrupt
orders were given, battling in the teeth of a stiff
breeze, off the coast of South America, About this
time several piratical vessels had succeeded in cutting
off a number of merchantmen near the coast of Brazil,
They had not only taken the valuable parts of their
cargoes, but had murdered the crews under circum-
stances of great cruelty. 'The ships trading to these
regions were, consequently, exceedingly careful to
avoid all suspicious craft as much as possible. It
was, therefore, with some anxiety that the men
watched the captain’s face as he examined the strange
sail through the telescope.
“A Spanish schooner,†muttered the captain, as he
shut up the glass with a bang. “I won’t trust her.
Up with the royals and rig out stun’-sails, Mr. Wilson,
(to the mate). Let her fall away, keep her head nor-
west, d’ye hear ?â€
“ Ay, ay, sir.â€
“Let go the lee braces and square the yards.
Look sharp, now, lads. If that blackguard gets hold
of us, yell have to walk the plank, every man of ye.â€
4
50 MARTIN RATTLER.
In a few minutes the ship’s course was completely
altered; a cloud of canvas spread out from the yards,
and the Firefly bounded on her course like a fresh
race-horse, But it soon became evident that the heavy
barque was no match for the schooner, which crowded
gail and bore down at a rate that bade fair to over-
haul them in a few hours. The chase continued till
evening, when suddenly the look-out at the mast-
head shouted, “ Land, ho!â€
“ Where away ?†cried the captain.
« Right ahead,†sang out the man.
“T]l run her ashore sooner than be taken,†mut-
tered the captain, with an angry scowl at the schooner,
which was now almost within range on the weather
quarter, with the dreaded black flag flying at her
peak. In a few minutes breakers were descried
ahead.
“D’ye see anything like a passage ?†shouted the
captain.
« Yes, sir; two points on the weather bow.â€
At this moment a white cloud burst from the
schooner’s bow, and a shot, evidently from a heavy
gun, came ricochetting over the sea. It was well
aimed, for it cut right through the barque’s main-
mast, just below the yard, and brought the main-top-
mast, with all the yards, sails, and gearing above it,
MARTIN RATTLER, 51
down upon the deck. The weight of the wreck, also,
carried away the fore-top-mast, and in a single instant
the Firefly was completely disabled.
“Lower away the boats,†cried the captain. “Look
alive, now; we'll give them the slip yet. It'll be
dark in two minutes,â€
The captain was right. In tropical regions there is
little or no twilight. Night succeeds day almost instan-
taneously. Before the boats were lowered and the men
embarked it was becoming quite dark. The schooner
observed the movement, however, and, as she did not
dare to venture through the reef in the dark, her boats
were also lowered, and the chase was recommenced.
The reef was passed in safety, and now a hard
struggle took place, for the shore was still far distant.
As it chanced to be cloudy weather, the darkness
became intense, and progress could only be guessed at
by the sound of the oars; but these soon told too
plainly that the boats of a schooner were overtaking
those of the barque.
“Pull with a will, lads,†cried the captain; “we
can’t be more than half-a-mile from shore; give way,
my hearties.â€
“Surely, captain, we can fight them ; we’ve most of
us got pistols and cutlasses,†said one of the men in a
sulky tone.
52 MARTIN RATTLER.
“Ficht them!†cried the captain; “ they're four
times our number, and every man armed to the teeth.
If ye don’t fancy walking the plank or dancing on
nothing at the yard-arm, ye’d better pull away and
hold your jaw.â€
By this time they could just see the schooner’s boats
in the dim light, about half musket range astern.
“Back you’ oars,†shouted a stern voice in broken
English, “or I blow you out de watter in one oder
moment—black-yards !â€
This order was enforced by a musket shot, which
whizzed over the boat within an inch of the captain’s
head. The men ceased rowing, and the boats of the
pirate ranged close up.
“Now then, Martin,†whispered Barney O’Flannagan,
who sat at the bow oar, “I’m goin’ to swim ashore;
jist you slip arter me as quiet as ye can.â€
“But the sharks!†suggested Martin.
“Bad luck to them,†said Barney as he slipped
over the side; “they’re welcome to me. I'll take my
chance. They'll find me mortial tough, anyhow. Come
along, lad, look sharp!â€
Without 2 moment’s hesitation Martin slid over the
gunwale into the sea, and, just as the pirate boats
grappled with those of the barque, he and Barney
found themselves gliding as silently as otters towards
MARTIN RATTLER. 53
the shore. So quietly had the manceuvre been ac-
complished, that the men in their own boat were
ignorant of their absence. In a few minutes they
were beyond the chance of detection.
“ Keep close to me, lad,†whispered the Irishman.
“If we separate in the darkness, we'll niver forgather
again. Catch hould o’ my shoulder if ye get blowed,
and splutter as much as ye like. They can’t hear us
now, and it'll help to frighten the sharks,â€
“All right,†replied Martin; “I can swim like a
cork in such warm water as this. Just go a little
slower and I'll do famously.â€
Thus encouraging each other, and keeping close
together, lest they should get separated in the thick
darkness of the night, the two friends struck out
bravely for the shore. —
CHAPTER VII.
Martin and Barney get lost in a great forest, where they see strange and
terrible things.
N gaining the beach, the first thing that Barney
did, after shaking himself like a huge New-
foundland dog, was to ascertain that his pistol and
cutlass were safe; for, although the former could be
of no use in its present condition, still, as he saga-
ciously remarked, “it was a good thing to have, for
they might chance to git powder wan day or other,
and the flint would make fire, anyhow.†Fortunately
the weather was extremely warm; so they were
enabled to take off and wring their clothes without
much inconvenience, except that in a short time a
few adventurous mosquitoes—probably sea-faring
ones—came down out of the woods and attacked their
bare bodies so vigorously that they were fain to hurry
on their clothes again before they were quite dry.
The clouds began to clear away soon after they
landed, and the brilliant light of the southern con-
MARTIN RATTLER. 55
stellations revealed to them dimly the appearance of
the coast. It was a low sandy beach skirting the sea
and extending back for about a quarter of a mile in
the form of a grassy plain, dotted here and there with
scrubby underwood. Beyond this was a dark line of
forest. The light was not sufficient to enable them
to ascertain the appearance of the interior. Barney
and Martin now cast about in their minds how they
were to spend the night.
“ Ye see,†said the Irishman, “it’s of no use goin’
to look for houses, because there’s maybe none at all
on this coast; an’ there’s no sayin’ but we may fall
in with savages—for them parts swarms with them;
so we'd better go into the woods an’-—â€
Barney was interrupted here by a low howl, which
proceeded from the woods referred to, and was most
unlike any ery they had ever heard before.
“Och, but I'll think better of it. Paps it'll be
as well not to go into the woods, but to camp where
we are,â€
“T think so too,†said Martin, searching about for
small twigs and drift-wood with which to make a
fire. “There is no saying what sort of wild beasts
may be in the forest, so we had better wait till day-
light.â€
A fire was quickly lighted by means of the pistol-
56 MARTIN RATTLER.
flint and a little dry grass, which, when well bruised
and put into the pan, caught a spark after one or two
attempts, and was soon blown into a flame. But no
wood large enough to keep the fire burning for any
length of time could be found; so Barney said he
would go up to the forest and fetch some. “Tl lave
my shoes and socks, Martin, to dry at the fire. See
ye don’t let them burn.â€
Traversing the meadow with hasty strides, the bold
sailor quickly reached the edge of the forest, where
he began to lop off several dead branches from the
trees with his cutlass. While thus engaged the howl
which had formerly startled him was repeated. “Av
I only knowed what ye was,†muttered Barney in a
serious tone, “it would be some sort o’ comfort.â€
A loud cry of a different kind here interrupted his
soliloquy, and soon after the first cry was repeated
louder than before.
Clinching his teeth and knitting his brows the per-
plexed Irishman resumed his work with a desperate
resolve not to be again interrupted. But he had
miscalculated the strength of his nerves. Albeit as
brave a man ag ever stepped, when his enemy was
before him, Barney was, nevertheless, strongly imbued
with superstitious feelings; and the conflict between
his physical courage and his mental cowardice pro-
MARTIN RATTLER. 57
duced a species of wild exasperation, which, he often
asserted, was very hard to bear. Searcely had he
resumed his work when a bat of enormous size
brushed past his nose so noiselessly that it seemed
more like a phantom than a reality. Barney had
never seen anything of the sort before, and a cold
perspiration broke out upon him when he fancied it
might be a ghost. Again the bat swept past close to
his eyes.
“Musha, but Tl kill ye, ghost or no ghost,†he
ejaculated, gazing all round into the gloomy depths
of the woods with his cutlass uplifted. Instead of
flying again in front of him, as he had expected, the
bat flew with a whirring noise past his ear. Down
came the cutlass with a sudden thwack, cutting deep
into the trunk of a small tree, which trembled under
the shock, and sent a shower of ripe nuts of a large
size down upon the sailor’s head. Startled as he was,
he sprang backward with a wild ery; then, half
ashamed of his groundless fears, he collected the
wood he had cut, threw it hastily on his shoulder,
and went with a quick step out of the woods. In
doing so he put his foot upon the head of a small
snake, which wriggled up round his ankle and leg.
If there was anything on earth that Barney abhorred
and dreaded it was a snake. No sooner did he feel
58 MARTIN RATTLER.
its cold form writhing under his foot, than he uttered
a tremendous yell of terror, dropped his bundle of
sticks, and fled precipitately to the beach, where he
did not halt till he found himself knee-deep in the sea.
“Och, Martin, boy,†gasped the affrighted sailor,
“it’s my belafe that all the evil spirits on arth live in
yonder wood ; indeed I do.â€
“ Nonsense, Barney,†said Martin, laughing ; “there
are no such things as ghosts; at any rate I’m resolved
to face them, for if we don’t get some sticks the fire
will go out and leave us very comfortless. Come;
Til go up with you.â€
“Put on yer shoes then, avic, for the sarpints are
no ghosts, anyhow, and I’m tould they're pisonous
sometimes.â€
They soon found the bundle of dry sticks that
Barney had thrown down, and returning with it to
the beach, they speedily kindled a roaring fire, which
made them feel quite cheerful. True, they had noth-
ing to eat; but having had a good dinner on board
the barque late that afternoon, they were not much
in want of food. While they sat thus on the sand of
the sea-shore, spreading their hands before the blaze
and talking over their strange position, a low rumbling
of distant thunder was heard. Barney’s countenance
instantly fell.
MARTIN RATTLER. 59
“ What’s the matter, Barney?†inquired Martin, as
he observed his companion gaze anxiously up at the
sky.
“ Och, it’s comin’, sure enough.â€
“ And what though it does come ?†returned Martin ;
“we can creep under one of these thick bushes till the
shower is past.â€
“Did ye iver see a thunder-storm in the tropics?â€
inquired Barney.
“No, never,†replied Martin.
“Then, if ye don’t want to feel and see it both at
wance, come with me as quick as iver ye can.â€
Barney started up as he spoke, stuck his cutlass
and pistol into his belt, and set off towards the woods
at a sharp run, followed closely by his wondering
companion.
Their haste was by no means unnecessary. Great
black clouds rushed up towards the zenith from all
points of the compass, and, just as they reached the
woods, darkness so thick that it might almost be felt
overspread the scene. Then there was a flash of
lightning so vivid that it seemed as if a bright day
had been created and extinguished in a moment,
leaving the darkness ten times more oppressive. It
was followed instantaneously by a crash and a pro-
longed rattle, that sounded as if a universe of solid
60 MARTIN RATTLER.
worlds were rushing into contact overhead and burst-
ing into atoms. The flash was so far useful to the
fugitives that it enabled them to observe a many-
stemmed tree with dense and heavy foliage, under
which they darted. They were just in time, and had
scarcely seated themselves among its branches when
the rain came down in a way not only that Martin
had never seen, but that he had never conceived of
before. It fell, as it were, in broad heavy sheets, and
its sound was a loud, continuous roar.
The wind soon after burst upon the forest and
added to the hideous shriek of elements. The trees
bent before it; the rain was whirled and dashed
about in water-spouts; and huge limbs were rent
from some of the larger trees with a crash like
thunder, and swept far away into the forest. The
very earth trembled and seemed terrified at the dread-
ful conflict going on above. It seemed to the two
friends as if the end of the world were come; and
they could do nothing but cower among the branches
of the tree and watch the storm in silence, while
they felt, in a way they had never before experienced,
how utterly helpless they were and unable to foresee
or avert the many dangers by which they were
surrounded, and how absolutely dependent they were
on God for protection.
MARTIN RATTLER. 61
For several hours the storm continued. Then it
ceased as suddenly as it had begun, and the bright
stars again shone down upon the peaceful scene.
When it was over, Martin and his comrade de-
scended the tree and endeavoured to find their way
back to the beach. But this was no easy matter.
The haste with which they had run into the woods,
and the confusion of the storm, had made them un-
certain in which direction it lay; and the more they
tried to get out, the deeper they penetrated into the
forest. At length, wearied with fruitless wandering
and stumbling about in the dark, they resolved to
spend the night where they were. Coming to a place
which was more open than usual, and where they
could see a portion of the starry sky overhead, they
sat down on a dry spot under the shelter of a spread-
ing tree, and, leaning their backs against the trunk,
very soon fell sound asleep.
CHAPTER VIII.
An enchanting land—An uncomfortable bed, and a queer breakfast—Many
surprises and a few frights, together with a notable discovery.
« VT VE woked in paradise!â€
I Such was the exclamation that aroused Martin
Rattler on the morning after his landing on the coast
of South America. It was uttered by Barney O’Flan-
nagan, who lay at full length on his back, his head
propped up by a root of the tree under which they
had slept, and his eyes staring right before him with
an expression of concentrated amazement. When
Martin opened his eyes, he too was struck dumb with
surprise. And well might they gaze with astonish-
ment; for the last ray of departing daylight on the
night before had flickered over the open sea, and now
the first gleam of returning sunshine revealed to them
the magnificent forests of Brazil.
Yes, well might they gaze and gaze again in
boundless admiration ; for the tropical sun shone down
on a scene of dazzling and luxuriant vegetation, so
MARTIN RATTLER. 63
resplendent that it seemed to them the realization of
a fairy tale. Plants and shrubs and flowers were
there of the most curious and brilliant description,
and of which they neither knew the uses nor the
names. Majestic trees were there with foliage of
every shape and size and hue—some with stems twenty
feet in circumference, others more slender in form,
straight and tall, and some twisted in a bunch to-
gether and rising upwards like fluted pillars; a few
had buttresses, or natural planks, several feet broad,
ranged all round their trunks, as if to support them ;
while many bent gracefully beneath the load of their
clustering fruit and heavy foliage. Orange-trees with
their ripe fruit shone in the sunbeams like gold.
Stately palms rose above the surrounding trees and
waved their feathery plumes in the air, and bananas
with broad enormous leaves rustled in the breeze and
cast a cool shadow on the ground.
Well might they gaze in great surprise, for all
these curious and beautiful trees were surrounded by
and entwined in the embrace of luxuriant and re-
markable climbing-plants. The parasitic vanilla with
its star-like blossoms crept up their trunks and along
their branches, where it hung in graceful festoons, or
drooped back again almost to the ground. So rich
and numerous were these creepers that in many cases
64 MARTIN RATTLER.
they killed the strong giants whom they embraced
so lovingly. Some of them hung from the tree-tops
like stays from the masts of a ship, and many of them
mingled their brilliant flowers so closely with the
leaves that the climbing-plants and their supporters
could not be distinguished from each other, and it
seemed as though the trees themselves had become
gigantic flowering shrubs.
Birds, too, were there in myriads—and such birds!
Their feathers were green and gold and scarlet and
yellow and blue—fresh and bright and brilliant as
the sky beneath which they were nurtured. The great
toucan, with a beak nearly as big as his body, flew
clumsily from stem to stem. The tiny, delicate
humming-birds, scarce larger than bees, fluttered from
flower to flower and spray to spray like points of
brilliant green. But they were irritable, passionate
little creatures, these lovely things, and quarrelled
with each other and fought like very wasps! Enor-
mous butterflies, with wings of deep metallic blue,
shot past or hovered in the air like gleams of light;
and green paroquets swooped from tree to tree, and
chattered joyfully over their morning meal.
Well might they gaze with wonder, and smile too
with extreme merriment, for monkeys stared at them
from between the leaves with expressions of undis-
MARTIN RATTLER. 65
guised amazement, and bounded away shrieking and
chattering in consternation, swinging from branch to
branch with incredible speed, and not scrupling to use
each other’s tails to swing by when occasion offered.
Some were big and red and ugly—as ugly as you can
possibly imagine, with blue faces and fiercely grinning
teeth; others were delicately formed, and sad of
countenance, as if they were for ever bewailing the
loss of near and dear relations, and could by no means
come at consolation ; and some were small and pretty,
with faces no bigger than a halfpenny. As a general
rule, it seemed to Barney, the smaller the monkey the
longer the tail.
Yes, well might they gaze and gaze again in sur-
prise and in excessive admiration; and well might
Barney O’Flannagan—under the circumstances, with
such sights and sounds around him, and the delight-
ful odours of myrtle trees and orange blossoms and
the Cape jessamine stealing up his nostrils—deem
himself the tenant of another world, and evince his
conviction of the fact in that memorable expression—
“T’ve woked in paradise !â€
But Barney began to find “paradise†not quite so
comfortable as it ought to be; for when he tried to
get up he found his bones pained and stiff from sleep-
ing in damp clothes, and, moreover, his face was very
5
66 MARTIN RATTLER.
much swelled, owing to the myriads of mosquitoes
which had supped of it during the night.
“ Arrah, then, won’t ye be done?†he cried angrily,
giving his face a slap that killed at least two or three
hundred of his tormentors. But thousands more
attacked him instantly, and he soon found out—what
every one finds out sooner or later in hot climates—
that patience is one of the best remedies for mosquito
bites. He also discovered shortly afterwards that
smoke is not a bad remedy, in connection with
patience.
“What are we to have for breakfast, Barney ?â€
inquired Martin, as he rose and yawned and stretched
his limbs.
“ Help yersilf to what ye plase,†said Barney, with
a polite bow, waving his hand round him, as if the
forest were his private property and Martin Rattler
his honoured guest.
“Well, I vote for oranges,†said Martin, going to-
wards a tree which was laden with ripe fruit.
“An Tl try plums, by way of variety,†added his
companion.
In a few minutes several kinds of fruit and nuts
were gathered and spread at the foot of the tree under
which they had reposed. Then Barney proceeded to
kindle a fire; not that he had anything to cook, but he
MARTIN RATTLER. 67
said it looked sociable-like, and the smoke would keep
off the flies. The operation, however, was by no
means easy. Everything had been soaked by the rain
of the previous night, and a bit of dry grass could
scarcely be found. At length he procured a little,
and by rubbing it in. the damp gunpowder which he
had extracted from his pistol, and drying it in the sun,
he formed a sort of tinder that caught fire after much
persevering effort.
Some of the fruits they found to be good, others
bad. The good they ate, the bad they threw away.
After their frugal fare they felt much refreshed, and
then began to talk of what they should do.
“We can’t live here with parrots and monkeys,
you know,†said Martin; “we must try to find a
village or town of some sort, or get to the coast, and
then we shall perhaps meet with a ship.â€
“True, lad,†replied Barney, knitting his brows
and looking extremely sagacious; “the fact is, since
neither of us knows nothing about anything, or the
way to any place, my advice is to walk straight
for’ard till we come to something.†-
“So think I,†replied Martin; “therefore the sooner
we set off the better.â€
Having no luggage to pack and no arrangements of
any kind to make, the two friends rose from their
68 ' MARTIN RATTLER.
primitive breakfast-table, and walked away straight
before them into the forest.
All that day they travelled patiently forward, con-
versing pleasantly about the various and wonderful
trees and flowers and animals they met with by the
way; but no signs were discovered that indicated the
presence of man. ‘Towards evening, however, they
fell upon a track or footpath, which discovery rejoiced
them much; and here, before proceeding farther, they
sat down to eat a little more fruit—which indeed they
had done several times during the day. They walked
nearly thirty miles that day without seeing a human
being ; but they met with many strange and beautiful
birds and beasts, some of which were of so fierce an
aspect that they would have been very glad to have
had guns to defend themselves with. Fortunately,
however, all the animals seemed to be much more
afraid of them than they were of the animals, so they
travelled in safety. Several times during the course
of the day they saw snakes and serpents, which glided
away into the jungle on their approach, and could not
be overtaken, although Barney made repeated darts
at. them, intending to attack them with his cutlass,
which assaults always proved fruitless.
Once they were charged by a herd of peccaries—
a species of pig or wild hog-—from which they escaped
MARTIN RATTLER. _ 69
by jumping actively to one side; but the peccaries
turned and rushed at them again, and it was only
by springing up the branches of a neighbouring tree
that they escaped their fury. These peccaries are
the fiercest and most dauntless animals in the forests
of Brazil. They do not know what fear is; they will
rush in the face of anything; and, unlike all other
animals, are quite indifferent to the report of fire-arms.
Their bodies are covered with long bristles, resembling
very much the quills of the porcupine.
As the evening drew on, the birds and beasts and
the innumerable insects, that had kept up a per-
petual noise during the day, retired to rest; and then
the nocturnal animals began to creep out of their
holes and go about. Huge vampire-bats, one of
which had given Barney such a fright the night
before, flew silently past them, and the wild howlings
commenced again. They now discovered that one of
the most dismal of the howls proceeded from a species
of monkey, at which discovery Martin laughed very
much, and rallied his companion on being so easily
frightened; but Barney gladly joined in the laugh
against himself, for, to say truth, he felt quite relieved
and light-hearted at discovering that his ghosts were
converted into bats and monkeys!
There was one roar, however, which, when they
70 MARTIN RATTLER.
heard it ever and anon, gave them considerable un-
easiness.
“D’ye think there’s lions in them parts?†inquired
Barney, glancing with an expression of regret at his
empty pistol, and laying his hand on the hilt of his
cutlass.
“I think not,’ replied Martin, in a low tone of
voice. “I have read in my school geography that
there are tigers of some sort—jaguars or ounces, I
think they are called—but there are no—â€
Martin’s speech was cut short by a terrific roar
which rang through the woods, and the next instant
a magnificent jaguar, or South American tiger,
bounded on to the track a few yards in advance,
and, wheeling round, glared fiercely at the travellers.
It seemed, in the uncertain light, as if his eyes were
two balls of living fire. Though not so large as the
royal Bengal tiger of India, this animal was never-
theless of immense size, and had a very ferocious
aspect. His roar was so sudden and awful, and his
appearance so unexpected, that the blood was sent
thrilling back into the hearts of the travellers, who
stood rooted to, the spot, absolutely unable to move.
This was the first large animal of the cat kind that
either of them had seen in all the terrible majesty of
its wild condition ; and, for the first time, Martin and
MARTIN RATTLER. 71
his friend felt that awful sensation of dread that will
assail even the bravest heart when a new species of
imminent danger is suddenly presented. It is said
that no animal can withstand the steady gaze of a
human eye, and many travellers in wild countries
have proved this to be a fact. On the present
occasion our adventurers stared long and steadily at
the wild creature before them, from a mingled feeling
of surprise and horror. In a few seconds the jaguar
showed signs of being disconcerted. It turned its
head from side to side slightly, and dropped its eyes,
as if to avoid their gaze. Then turning slowly and
stealthily round, it sprang with a magnificent bound
into the jungle and disappeared.
Both Martin and Barney heaved a deep sigh of
relief.
“What a merey it did not attack us!†said the
former, wiping the cold perspiration from his forehead.
“We should have had no chance against such a terrible
beast with a cutlass, I fear.â€
“True, boy, true,†replied his friend gravely; “it
would have been little better than a penknife in the
ribs o’ sich a cratur. I niver thought that it was in
the power o’ man or baste to put me in sich a fright ;
but the longer we live we learn, boy.â€
Barney's disposition to make light of everything
72 MARTIN RATTLER.
was thoroughly subdued by this incident, and, he felt
none of his usual inclination to regard all that he saw
in the Brazilian forests with a comical eye. The
danger they had escaped was too real and terrible,
and their almost unarmed condition too serious, to be
lightly esteemed. For the next hour or two he con-
tinued to walk by Martin’s side either in total silence
or in earnest, grave conversation; but by degrees these
feelings wore off, and his buoyant spirits gradually
returned.
The country over which they had passed during
the day was of a mingled character. At one time
they traversed a portion of dark forest, heavy and
choked up with the dense and gigantic foliage peculiar
to those countries that lie near to the equator; then
they emerged from this upon what to their eyes
seemed most beautiful scenery—-mingled plain and
woodland—where the excessive brilliancy and beauty
of the tropical vegetation was brought to perfection by
exposure to the licht of the blue sky and the warm
rays of the sun. In such lovely spots they travelled
more slowly and rested more frequently, enjoying to
the full the sight of the gaily-coloured birds and
insects that fluttered busily around them, and the
delicious perfume of the flowers that decked the
ground and clambered up the trees. At other times
MARTIN RATTLER. 73
they came to plains, or campos, as they are termed,
where there were no trees at all, and few shrubs, and
where the grass was burned brown and dry by the
sun. Over such they hurried as quickly as they
could; and fortunately, where they chanced to travel,
such places were neither numerous nor extensive,
although in some districts of Brazil there are campos
hundreds of miles in extent.
A small stream meandered through the forest, and
enabled them to refresh themselves frequently, which
was very fortunate; for the heat, especially towards
noon, became extremely intense, and they could not
have existed without water. So great, indeed, was
the heat about mid-day that, by mutual consent, they
resolved to seek the cool shade of a spreading tree,
and try to sleep if possible. At this time they learned,
to their surprise, that all animated nature did likewise,
and sought repose at noon. God had implanted in
the breast of every bird and insect in that mighty
forest an instinct which taught it to rest and find re-
freshment during the excessive heat of mid-day; so
that, during the space of two or three hours, not a
thing with life was seen, and not a sound was heard.
Even the troublesome mosquitoes, so active at all
other times, day and night, were silent now. The
change was very great and striking, and difficult for
74 MARTIN RATTLER.
those who have not observed it to comprehend. All
the forenoon, screams, and cries, and croaks, and
erunts, and whistles ring out through the woods in-
cessantly ; while, if you listen attentively, you hear
the low, deep, and never-ending buzz and hum of
millions upon millions of insects, that dance in the air
and creep on every leaf and blade upon the ground.
About noon all this is hushed. The hot rays of the
sun beat perpendicularly down upon what seems a
vast untenanted solitude, and not a single chirp breaks
the death-like stillness of the great forest, with the
solitary exception of the metallic note of the uruponga,
or bell-bird, which seems to mount guard when all the
rest of the world has gone to sleep. As the afternoon
approaches they all wake up, refreshed by their siesta,
active and lively as fairies, and ready for another
spell of work and another deep-toned noisy chorus.
The country through which our adventurers tra-
velled, as evening approached, became gradually more
hilly, and their march consequently more toilsome.
They were just about to give up all thought of
proceeding farther that night when, on reaching the
summit of a little hill, they beheld a bright red light
shining at a considerable distance in the valley beyond.
With light steps and hearts full of hope they descended
the hill and hastened towards it.
CHAPTER IX.
The hermit.
T was now quite dark, and the whole country
l seemed alive with fire-flies. These beautiful
little insects sat upon the trees and bushes, spangling
them as with living diamonds, and flew about in the
air like little wandering stars. Barney had seen
them before, in the West Indies; but Martin had only
heard of them, and his delight and amazement at
their extreme brilliancy were very great. Although
he was naturally anxious to reach the light in the
valley, in the hope that it might prove to proceed
from some cottage, he could not refrain from stopping
once or twice to catch these lovely creatures; and
when he succeeded in doing so, and placed one on the
palm of his hand, the light emitted from it was more
brilliant than that of a small taper, and much more
beautiful, for it was of a bluish colour, and very in-
tense—more like the light reflected from a jewel than
a flame of fire. He could have read a book by means
of it quite easily
76 MARTIN RATTLER.
In half-an-hour they drew near to the light, which
they found proceeded from the window of a small
cottage or hut.
“Whist, Martin,†whispered Barney, as they ap-
proached the hut on tiptoe; “there may be savages
into it, an’ there’s no sayin’ what sort o’ craturs
they are in them parts.â€
When about fifty yards distant, they could see
through the open window into the room where the
light burned; and what they beheld there was well
calculated to fill them with surprise. On a rude
wooden chair, at a rough unpainted table, a man was
seated, with his head resting on his hand and his
eyes fixed intently on a book. Owing to the dis-
tance, and the few leaves and branches that inter-
vened between them and the hut, they could not
observe him very distinctly. But it was evident that
he was a large and strong man, a little past the prime
of life. The hair of his head and beard was black
and bushy, and streaked with silver-gray. His face
was massive, and of a dark olive complexion, with an
expression of sadness on it, strangely mingled with
stern gravity. His broad shoulders—and, indeed, his
whole person—were enveloped in the coarse folds cf
a long gown or robe, gathered in at the waist with a
broad band of leather.
MARTIN RATTLER. 17
The room in which he sat—or rather the hut, for
there was but one room in it—was destitute of all
furniture, except that already mentioned, besides one
or two roughly-formed stools; but the walls were
completely covered with strange-looking implements
and trophies of the chase; and in a corner lay a con-
fused pile of books, some of which were, from their
appearance, extremely ancient. All this the benighted
wanderers observed as they continued to approach
cautiously on tiptoe. So cautious did they become as
they drew near and came within the light of the
lamp, that Barney at length attempted to step over
his own shadow for fear of making a noise, and in
doing so tripped and fell with considerable noise
through a hedge of prickly shrubs that encircled the
strange man’s dwelling.
The hermit—for such he appeared to be—be-
trayed no symptom of surprise or fear at the sud-
den sound, but rising quietly though quickly from
his seat, took down a musket that hune on the
wall, and stepping to the open door demanded
sternly, in the Portuguese language, “Who goes
there ?â€
“ Arrah, then, if ye’d help a fellow-cratur to rise,
instead o’ talkin’ gibberish like that, it would be more
to yer credit!†exclaimed the Irishman, as he scram-
78 MARTIN RATTLER.
bled to his feet and presented himself, along with
Martin, at the hermit’s door.
A peculiar smile lighted up the man’s features as
he retreated into the hut, and invited the strangers
to enter.
“Come in,†said he, in good English, although with
a slightly foreign accent. “I am most happy to see
you. You are English. I know the voice and the
language very well. Lived among them once, but
long time past now—very long. Have not seen one
of you for many years.â€
With many such speeches and much expression of
good-will the hospitable hermit invited Martin and
his companion to sit down at his rude table, on which
he quickly spread several plates of ripe and dried
fruits, a few cakes, and a jar of excellent honey, with
a stone bottle of cool water. When they were busily
engaged with these viands, he began to make in-
quiries as to where his visitors had come from.
“We've comed from the sae,†replied Barney, as he
devoted himself to a magnificent pine-apple. “ Och,
but yer victuals is mighty good, Mister—what’s yer
name ?—'ticklerly to them that’s a’most starvin’.â€
“The fact is,’ said Martin, “our ship has been
taken by pirates, and we two swam ashore and lost
ourselves in the woods; and now we have stumbled
MARTIN RATTLER. 79
upon your dwelling, friend, which is a great com-
fort.â€
“Hoigh, an’ that’s true,†sighed Barney, as he
finished the last slice of the pine-apple.
They now explained to their entertainer all the
circumstances attending the capture of the Firefly,
and their subsequent adventures and vicissitudes in
the forest; all of which Barney detailed in a most
graphic manner, and to all of which their new friend
listened with grave attention and unbroken silence.
When they had concluded, he said,—
“Very good. You have seen much in very short
time. Perhaps you shall see more by-and-by. For the
present you will go to rest, for you must be fatigued.
I will think to-night—to-morrow I will speak.â€
“ An’ if I may make so bould,†said Barney, glanc-
ing with a somewhat rueful expression round the
hard earthen floor of the hut, “whereabouts may I
take the liberty o’ sleepin’ ?â€
The hermit replied by going to a corner, whence,
from beneath a heap of rubbish, he dragged two
hammocks, curiously wrought in a sort of light
network. These he slung across the hut, at one
end, from wall to wall, and throwing a sheet or
coverlet into each, he turned with a smile to his
visitors,—
80 MARTIN RATTLER.
“ Behold your beds! I wish you a very good sleep
adios |â€
So saying, this strange individual sat down at the
table, and was soon as deeply engaged with his large
book as if he had suffered no interruption; while
Martin and Barney, having gazed gravely and ab-
stractedly at him for five minutes, turned and smiled
to each other, Jumped into their hammocks, and were
soon buried in deep slumber.
CHAPTER X.
An cnemy in the night—The vampire bat—The hermit discourses on
strange, and curious, and interesting things.
EXT morning Martin Rattler awoke with a
N feeling of lightness in his head and a sensa-
tion of extreme weakness pervading his entire frame.
Turning his head round to the right he observed that
a third hammock was slung across the farther end of
the hut, which was, no doubt, that in which the
hermit had passed the night, But it was empty now.
Martin did not require to turn his head to the other
side to see if Barney O’Flannagan was there, for that
worthy individual made his presence known, for a
distance of at least sixty yards all round the outside
of the hut, by -means of his nose, which he was in the
habit of using as a trumpet when asleep. It was as
well that Martin did not require to look round, for
he found, to his surprise, that he had scarcely strength
to do so. While he was wondering in a dreamy sort
of manner what could be the matter with him, the
6
82 MARTIN RATTLER.
hermit entered the hut bearing a small deer upon his
shoulders. Resting his gun in a corner of the room,
he advanced to Martin’s hammock.
“My boy!†he exclaimed in surprise, “what is
wrong with you?â€
“Tm sure I don’t know,†said Martin faintly. “I
think there is something wet about my feet.â€
Turning up the sheet, he found that Martin’s feet
were covered with blood! For a few seconds the
hermit growled forth a number of apparently very
pithy sentences in Portuguese, in a deep guttural
voice, which awakened Barney with a start. Spring-
ing from his hammock with a bound like a tiger, he
exclaimed, “Och! ye blackguard, would ye murther
the boy before me very nose?†and seizing the hermit
in his powerful grasp, he would infallibly have hurled
him, big though he was, through his own doorway, had
not Martin cried out, “Stop, stop, Barney! It’s all
right ; he’s done nothing,†on hearing which the Ivish-
man loosened his hold, and turned towards his friend.
“What's the matter, honey?†said Barney in a
soothing tone of voice, as a mother might address her
infant son.
The hermit, whose composure had not been in the
slightest degree disturbed, here said,—
“The poor child has been sucked by a vampire bat.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 83
“ Ochone!†groaned Barney, sitting down on the
table, and looking at his host with a face of
horror.
“Yes, these are the worst animals in Brazil for
sucking the blood of men and cattle. I find it quite
impossible to keep my mules alive, they are so
bad.â€
Barney groaned.
“They have killed two cows which I tried to keep
here, and one young horse—a foal you call him, I
think ; and now I have no cattle remaining, they are
so bad.â€
Barney groaned again, and the hermit went on to
enumerate the wicked deeds of the vampire bats, while
he applied poultices of certain herbs to Martin’s toe,
in order to check the bleeding, and then bandaged it
up; after which he sat down to relate to his visitors
the manner in which the bat carries on its bloody
operations. He explained, first of all, that the vam-
pire bats are so large and ferocious that they often
kill horses and cattle by sucking their blood out. Of
course they cannot do this at one meal, but they
attack the poor animals again and again, and the
blood continues to flow from the wounds they make
long afterwards, so that the creatures attacked soon
grow weak and die. They attack men, too, as Martin
84 MARTIN RATTLER.
knew to his cost; and they usually fix upon the toes
and other extremities. So gentle are they in their
operations, that sleepers frequently do not feel the
puncture which they make, it is supposed, with the
sharp-hooked nail of their thumb; and the uncon-
scious victim knows nothing of the enemy who has
been draining his blood until he awakens, faint and
exhausted, in the morning.
Moreover, the hermit told them that these vampire
bats have very sharp, carnivorous teeth, besides a
tongue which is furnished with the curious organs
by which they suck the life-blood of their victims ;
that they have a peculiar, leaf-like, overhanging lip ;
and that he had a stuffed specimen of a bat that
measured no less than two feet across the expanded
wings, from tip to tip.
“Och, the blood-thirsty spalpeen!†exclaimed
Barney, as he rose and crossed the room to examine
the bat in question, which was nailed against the
wall. “Bad luck to them; they've ruined Martin
intirely.â€
“Oh no,†remarked the hermit with a smile. “It
will do the boy much good the loss of the blood,
much good, and he will not be sick at all to-
morrow.â€
“Tm glad to hear you say so,†said Martin; “for
oS + ?
MARTIN RATTLER. 85
it would be a great bore to be obliged to lie here
when I’ve so many things to see. In fact I feel
better already, and if you will be so kind as to give
me a little breakfast I shall be quite well.â€
While Martin was speaking, the obliging hermit—
who, by the way, was now habited in a loose, ‘short
hunting-coat of brown cotton—spread a plentiful re-
past upon his table, to which, having assisted Martin
to get out of his hammock, they all proceeded to do
ample justice; for the travellers were very hungry
after the fatigue of the previous day, and as for the
hermit, he looked like a man whose appetite was
always sharp set, and whose food agreed with him.
They had cold meat of several kinds, and a hot
steak of.venison just killed that morning, which the
hermit cooked while his guests were engaged with
the other viands. There was also excellent coffee,
and superb cream, besides cakes made of a species of
coarse flour or meal, fruits of various kinds, and very
fine honey.
“Arrah! ye’ve the hoith o’ livin’ here!†cried
Barney, smacking his lips as he held out his plate for
another supply of a species of meat which resembled
chicken in tenderness and flavour. “ What sort 0
bird or baste may that be, now, av I may ask ye,
Mister—what’s yer name ?â€
86 MARTIN RATTLER.
“My name is Carlos,†replied the hermit gravely ;
“and this is the flesh of the armadillo.â€
“ Arma—what—o?†inquired Barney.
“ Armadillo,†repeated the hermit. “He is very
good to eat, but very difficult to catch. He digs
down so fast we cannot catch him, and must smoke
him out of his hole.â€
“Have you many cows?†inquired Martin, as he
replenished his cup with coffee.
“Cows?†echoed the hermit; “I have got no
cows.â€
“Where do you get such capital cream, then?â€
asked Martin in surprise.
The ‘hermit smiled. “Ah, my friends, that cream
has come from a very curious cow. It is from a cow
that grows in the ground.â€
“Grows!†ejaculated his guests.
“Yes, he grows. I will show him to you one
day.â€
The hermit’s broad shoulders shook with a quiet
internal laugh. “I will explain a little of that you
behold on my table. The coffee I get from the trees.
There are plenty of them here. Much money is made
in Brazil by the export of coffee—very much. The
cakes are made from the mandioca root, which I grow
near my house. The root is dried and ground into
MARTIN RATTLER. 87
flour, which, under the general name farina, is used
all over the country. It is almost the only food
used by the Indians and Negroes.â€
“Then there are Injins and Niggers here, are
there?†inquired Barney.
“Yes, a great many. Most of the Negroes are
slaves; some of the Indians too; and the people who
are descended from the Portuguese who came and
took the country long ago, they are the masters —
Well, the honey I get in holes in the trees. There
are different kinds of honey here; some of it is sour
honey. And the fruits and roots, the plantains, and
bananas, and yams, and cocoa-nuts, and oranges, and
plums, all grow in the forest, and much more besides,
which you will see for yourselves if you stay long
here.â€
“Tt’s a quare country, intirely,†remarked Barney,
as he wiped his mouth and heaved a sigh of content-
ment. Then, drawing his hand over his chin, he
looked earnestly in the hermit’s face, and, with a
peculiar twinkle in his eye, said,—
“T s’pose ye couldn’t favour me with the lind of a
raazor, could ye?â€
“No, my friend; I never use that foolish weapon.â€
“ Ah, well, as there’s only monkeys and jaguars,
and sich like to see me, it don’t much signify; but
88 MARTIN RATTLER.
my mustaches is gitin’ mighty long, for I’ve been two
weeks already without a shave.â€
Martin laughed heartily at the grave, anxious ex-
pression of his comyrade’s face. “Never mind, Barney,â€
he said, “a beard and moustache will improve you
vastly. Besides, they will be a great protection
against mosquitoes ; for you are such a hairy monster,
that when they grow nothing of your face will be
exposed except your eyes and cheek-bones. And
now,†continued Martin, climbing into his hammock
again and addressing the hermit, “since you won’t
allow me to go out a-hunting to-day, I would like
very much if you would tell me something more
about this strange country.â€
“ An’ maybe,†suggested Barney modestly, “ ye won’t
object to tell us something about yersilf—how you
came for to live in this quare, solitary kind of a
way.â€
The hermit looked gravely from one to the other,
and stroked his beard. Drawing his rude chair to-
wards the door of the hut, he folded his arms, and
crossed his legs, and gazed dreamily forth upon the
rich landscape. Then, glancing again at his guests,
he said slowly, “ Yes, I will do what you ask—TI will
tell you my story.â€
“An’ if I might make so bould as to inquire,†said
MARTIN RATTLER. 89
Barney, with a deprecatory smile, while he drew a
short black pipe from his pocket, “have ye got sich
a thing as ’baccy in them parts?â€
The hermit rose, and going to a small box which
stood in a corner, returned with a quantity of cut
tobacco in one hand, and a cigar not far short of a
foot long in the other! In a few seconds the cigar
was going in full force, like a factory chimney; and
the short black pipe glowed like a miniature furnace,
while its owner seated himself on a low stool, crossed
his arms on his breast, leaned his back against the
door-post, and smiled, as only an Irishman can smile
under such circumstances. The smoke soon formed
a thick cloud, which effectually drove the mosquitoes
out of the hut, and through which Martin, lying in
his hammock, gazed out upon the sunlit orange and
coffee trees, and tall palms with their rich festoons of
creeping plants, and sweet-scented flowers, that clam-
bered over and round the hut and peeped in at the
open door and windows, while he listened to the
hermit, who continued for at least ten minutes to
murmur slowly, between the puffs of his cigar, “ Yes,
I will do it—I will tell you my story.â€
CHAPTER XI.
The hermit’s story.
se Y ancestors,†began the hermit, “ were among
M the first to land upon Brazil, after the
country was taken possession of in the name of the
King of Portugal, in the year 1500. In the first
year of the century, Vincent Yanez Pingon, a com-
panion of the famed Columbus, discovered Brazil; and
in the next year, Pedro Alvarez Cabral, a Portuguese
commander, took possession of it in the name of the
King of Portugal. In 1503, Americus Vespucius dis-
covered the Bay of All Saints, and took home a cargo
of Brazil-wood, monkeys, and parrots; but no per-
manent settlement was effected upon the shores of the
new continent, and the rich treasures of this great
country remained for some years longer buried and
unknown to man, for the wild Indians who lived here
knew not their value.
“Jt was on a dark and stormy night in the year
1510. A group of swarthy and naked savages en-
MARTIN RATTLER. 91
circled a small fire on the edge of the forest on the
east coast of Brazil. The spot where their watchfire
was kindled is now covered by the flourishing city of
Bahia. At that time it was a wilderness. Before
them stretched the noble bay which is now termed
Bahia de Todos Santos—aAll Saints’ Bay.
“The savages talked earnestly and with excited
looks as they stood upon the shore, for the memory
of the wondrous ships of the white men that had
visited them a few years before was deeply engraven
on their minds; and now, in the midst of the howling
storm, another ship was seen approaching their land.
It was a small vessel, shattered and tempest-tossed,
that drove into the Bahia de Todos Santos on that
stormy night. Long had it battled with the waves of
the Atlantic, and the brave hearts that manned it had
remained stanch to duty and strong in hope, remem-
bering the recent glorious example of Columbus. But
the storm was fierce and the bark was frail. The
top-masts were broken and the sails rent; and worst
of all, just as land hove in sight and cheered the
drooping spirits of the crew, a tremendous wave
dashed upon the ship’s stern and carried away the
rudder.
“ As they drove helplessly before the gale towards
the shore, the naked savages crowded down upon the
92 MARTIN RATTLER.
beach and gazed in awe and astonishment at the mys-
terious ship. A few of them had seen the vessels of
Americus Vespucius and Cabral. The rumour of the
white men and their floating castles had been wafted
far and wide along the coast and into the interior of
Brazil, and with breathless wonder the natives had
listened to the strange account. But now the vision
was before them in reality. On came the floating
castle, the white foam dashing from her bows, and the
torn sails and ropes flying from her masts, as she
surged over the billows and loomed through the
driving spray.
“It was a grand sight to see that ship dashing
straight towards the shore at fearful speed; and those
who looked on seemed to be impressed with a vague
feeling that she had power to spring upon the strand
and continue her swift career through the forest, as
she had hitherto cleft her passage through the sea.
As she approached, the savages shrank back in fear.
Suddenly her frame trembled with a mighty shock.
A terrible ery was borne to land by the gale, and all
her masts went overboard. A huge wave lifted the
vessel on its erest and flung her farther on the shore,
where she remained firmly fixed, while the waves
dashed in foam around her and soon began to break
her up. Ere this happened, however,.a rope was
‘MARTIN RATTLER. 93
thrown ashore, and fastened to a rock by the natives.
By means of this the crew were saved. But it would
have been well for these bold navigators of Portugal
if they had perished in the stormy sea, for they were
spared by the ocean only to be murdered by the wild
savages on whose shore they had been cast.
“ All were slain save one—Diego Alvarez Carreo,
the captain of the ship. Before grasping the rope by
which he reached the shore, he thrust several cartridges
into his bosom and caught up a loaded musket. Wrap-
ping the lock in several folds of cloth to keep it dry,
he slid along the rope and gained the beach in safety.
Here he was seized by the natives, and would no
doubt have been barbarously slain with his unfortu-
nate ‘companions, but being a very powerful man he
dashed aside the foremost, and breaking through their
ranks, rushed towards the wood. The fleet savages,
however, overtook him in an instant, and were about
to seize him when a young Indian woman interposed
between them and their victim. This girl was the
chief’s daughter, and respect for her rank induced
them to hesitate for a moment; but in another instant
the Portuguese captain was surrounded. In the scuffle
that ensued his musket exploded, but fortunately
wounded no one. Instantly the horrified savages fled
in all directions, leaving Carreo alone!
94 MARTIN RATTLER.
“The captain was quick-witted. He knew that
among hundreds of savages it was madness to attempt
either to fight or to fly, and the happy effect of the
musket explosion induced him to adopt another course
of action. He drew himself up proudly to his full
height, and beckoned the savages to return. This
they did, casting many glances of fear at the dreaded
musket. Going up to one who, from his bearing and
ornaments, seemed to be a chief, Carreo laid his mus-
ket on the sand, and, stepping over it so that he left
it behind him, held out his hand frankly to the chief.
The savage looked at him in surprise, and suffered the
captain to take his hand and pat it; after which he
began to examine the stranger’s dress with much
curiosity. Seeing that their chief was friendly to the
white man, the other savages hurried him to the
camp-fire, where he soon stripped off his wet clothes
and ate the food which they put before him. Thus
Diego Carreo was spared.
“ Next day, the Indians lined the beach and collected
the stores of the wrecked vessel. While thus em-
ployed, Carreo shot a gull with his musket, which so
astonished the natives that they regarded him with
fear and respect amounting almost to veneration. A
considerable quantity of powder and shot was saved
from the wreck, so that the captain was enabled to
MARTIN RATTLER. 95
keep his ascendency over the ignorant natives; and
at length he became a man of great importance in the
tribe, and married the daughter of the chief. He
went by the name of Caramwru—‘the man of fire.’
This man founded the city of Bahia.
“The coasts of Brazil began soon after this to be
settled in various places by the Portuguese, who,
however, were much annoyed by the Spaniards, who
claimed a share in the rich prize. The Dutch and
English also formed settlements, but the Portuguese
still retained possession of the country, and continued
to prosper. Meanwhile Diego Caramuru, ‘the man of
fire†had a son who in course of time became a pros-
perous settler; and as his sons grew up he trained
them to become cultivators of the soil and traders in
the valuable products of the New World. He took
a piece of ground, far removed from the spot where
his father had been cast ashore, and a short distance
in the interior of the country. Here the eldest sons
of the family dwelt, laboured, and died, for many
generations,
“In the year 1808 Portugal was invaded by
Napoleon Buonaparte, and the sovereign of that king-
dom, John VI, fled to Brazil, accompanied by his
court and a large body of emigrants. The king was
warmly received by the Brazilians, and immediately
96 MARTIN RATTLER.
set about improving the condition of the country.
He threw open its ports to all nations, freed the land
from all marks of colonial dependence, established
newspapers, made the press free, and did everything
to promote education and industry. But although
much was done, the good was greatly hindered, especi-
ally in the inland districts, by the vice, ignorance, and
stupidity of many of the Roman Catholic priests, who
totally neglected their duties—which, indeed, they
were incompetent to perform-——-and in many in-
stances were no better than miscreants in disouise,
teaching the people vice instead of virtue.
“ Foremost among the priests who opposed advance-
ment was a descendant of the ‘man of fire.’ Padre
Caramuru dwelt for some years with an English mer-
chant in the capital of Brazil, Rio de Janeiro. The
padre was not an immoral man, but he was a fiery
bigot, and fiercely opposed everything that tended to
advance the education of the people. This he did,
firmly believing that education was dangerous to the
lower orders. His church taught him, too, that the
Bible was a dangerous book, and whenever a copy
fell into his hands he immediately destroyed it.
During the disturbances that took place after the
time of King John’s departure for Portugal, and just
before Brazil became an independent state under his
MARTIN RATTLER. 97
son, the Emperor Don Pedro IL. Padre Caramuru lost
a beloved and only brother. He was quite a youth,
and had joined the army only a few months previ-
ously at the desire of his elder brother the padre, who
was so overwhelmed by the blow that he ceased to
take an active part in church or political affairs, and
buried himself in a retired part of his native valley,
Here he sought relief and comfort in the study of
the beauties of nature by which he was surrounded,
but found none. Then he turned his mind to the
doctrines of his church, and took pleasure in verifying
them from the Bible. But as he proceeded he found,
to his great surprise, that these doctrines were, many
of them, not to be found there; nay, further, that
some of them were absolutely contradicted by the
Word of God.
“Padve Caramuru had been in the habit of com-
manding his people not to listen to the Bible when
any one offered to read it; but in the Bible itself he
found these words, ‘Search the Scriptures. He had
been in the habit of praying to the V irgin Mary, and
begging her to intercede with God for him ; but in the
Bible he found these words: ‘There is one mediator
between God and men, the man Christ Jesus.’ These
things perplexed him much. But while he was thus
searching, as it were, for silver, the ignorant padre found
7
98 MARTIN RATTLER.
gold! He found that he did not require to work for |
salvation, but to ask for it. He discovered that the
atonement had been made once for all by Jesus Christ,
the Lamb of God; and he read with a thrilling heart
these words: ‘God so loved the world, that he gave
his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in
him should not perish, but have everlasting life’
“Long and earnestly did the padre ponder these
words and pray over them; and gradually the Holy
Spirit enlightened his mind, and he saw how hateful
that system was which could forbid or discourage the
reading of the blessed Word of God. He soon re-
solved to forsake the priesthood. But when he had
done so, he knew not what to turn his hand to. He
had no one like-minded to consult with, and he felt
that it was wrong to eat the bread of idleness. Be-
ing thus uncertain what to do, he resolved in the
meantime to carry goods into the interior of the
country and offer them for sale. The land round his
dwelling and his own gun would supply him with
food; and for the rest, he would spend his time in
the study of the Bible, and seek for more light and
direction from God.
“Such,†continued the hermit, “is a slight sketch
of the history of my country and of myself.â€
“ Yourself!†exclaimed Martin.
MARTIN RATTLER. 99
“Yes. JI am the Padre Caramuru ; or rather, I was.
I am padre no longer, but Senhor Carlos Caramuru, a
merchant. Yet I know not what to do. When TI
look round upon my country and see how they know
not the precious Word of God, my heart burns in me,
and I sometimes think that it is my duty to go forth
and preach.â€
“No doubt ye are right,†said Barney. “T’ve
always bin of opinion that when a man feels very
strong in his heart on any partic’lar subject, it’s a sure
sign that the Almighty intends him to have something
more to do with that subject than other men who
don’t feel about it at all.â€
The hermit remained silent for a few minutes, « I
think you are right, friend,†he said; “but I am very
ignorant yet. I have no one to explain difficulties to
me; and I fear to go about preaching lest I should
preach what is not true. I will study yet for a
time, and pray. After that, perhaps, I may go forth.â€
“But you have told us nothing yet about the trade
of the country,†said Martin, “or its size, or anything
of that sort.â€
“I will soon tell you of that when I have lighted
another cigar. This one does not draw well. Have
you got a full pipe still, my friend 2â€
“All right, Mr. Carrymooroo,†replied Barney,
100 MARTIN RATTLER.
knocking out the ashes. “Tl jist load wance more,
and then—fire away.â€
In a few minutes the big cigar and short pipe were
in full play, and the hermit continued :—
“This country is very large and very rich, but it is
not well worked. The people are lazy, many of them,
and have not much enterprise. Much is done, no
doubt, but very much more might be done.
“The empire of Brazil occupies nearly one-half of
the whole continent of South America. It is 2,600
miles long, and 2,500 miles broad, which, as you
know perhaps, is a little larger than all Europe. The
surface of the country is beautiful and varied. The
hilly regions are very wild, although none of the
mountains are very high, and the woods are magnifi-
cent; but a great part of the land consists of vast
grassy plains, which are called llanos, or campos, or
silvas. The campos along the banks of the River
Amazon are equal to six times the size of France;
and there is one great plain, lying between the Si-
erra Ibiapaba and the River Tocantins, which is 600
miles long by 400 miles broad. There are very
few lakes in Brazil, and only one worth speaking of
—the Lagoa dos Platos—which is 150 miles long.
But our rivers are the finest in the whole world,
being so long and wide and deep and free from falls
MARTIN RATTLER. 101
that they afford splendid communication with the in-
terior of the land. But, alas! there are few ships on
these rivers yet, very few. The rivers in the north
part of Brazil are so numerous and interlaced that
they are much like the veins in the human body ;
and the great River Amazon and a few of its chief
tributaries resemble the arteries,
“Then as to our produce,†continued the hermit,
“who can tell it all? We export sugar and coffee,
and gold, silver, lead, zine, quicksilver, and amethysts,
and we have diamond mines—â€
~“Dimond mines!†echoed Barney; “och, but I
would like for to see them. Sure they would sparkle
most beautiful. Are they far off, Mr. Carrymooroo ?â€
“Yes, very far off. Then we export dye-woods
and cabinet-woods, and drugs, and gums, and hides—
a great many hides, for the campos are full of wild
cattle, and men hunt them on horseback, and catch
them with a long rope called the lasso.â€
“How I should like to have a gallop over these
great plains,†murmured Martin.
“Then: we have,†continued the hermit, “rice,
tapioca, cocoa, maize, wheat, mandioca, beans, bananas,
pepper, cinnamon, oranges, figs, ginger, pine-apples,
yams, lemons, mangoes, and many other fruits and
vegetables. The mandioca you have eaten in the
102 MARTIN RATTLER.
shape of farina. It is very good food; one acre gives
as much nutriment as six acres of wheat.
“Of the trees you have seen something. There
are thousands of kinds, and most magnificent. Some
of them are more than thirty feet round about. There
are two hundred different kinds of palms; and so
thick stand the giant trees in many places, with
creeping plants growing between, that it is nob pos-
sible for man to cut his way through the forests in
some parts. Language cannot describe the grandeur
and glory of the Brazilian forests,
“We have numbers of wild horses, and hogs, and
goats; and in the woods are tiger-cats, jaguars, tapirs,
hyenas, sloths, porcupines, and—but you have seen
many things already. If you live you will see more.
I need not tell you of these things; very soon I will
show you some.
“The population of my country consists of the
descendants of Portuguese settlers, native Indians,
and Negroes. Of the latter, some are free, some
slaves. The Indians go about nearly naked. Most
of them are in a savage state: they paint their skins,
and wear gaudy ornaments. The religion of the
country is Roman Catholic, but all religions are tole-
rated; and I have much hope for the future of Brazil,
_in spite of the priests.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 108
“And do ye git much out 0’ the di’mond mines?â€
inquired Barney, whose mind was running on this
subject.
“Oh yes, a great deal. Every year many are got,
and Government gets one-fifth of the value of all the
gold and diamonds found in the country. One
diamond was found a short time ago which was
worth £40,000.â€
“Ye don’t say so!†exclaimed Barney in great
surprise, as he blew an immense cloud of smoke from
his lips. “ Now, that’s extr’or’nary. Why don’t every-
body go to the mines and dig up their fortin at wance?â€
“Because men cannot eat diamonds,†replied the
hermit gravely.
“Troth, I niver thought o’ that; ye’re right.â€
Martin laughed heartily as he lay in his hammock
and watched his friend’s expression while pondering
this weighty subject.
“ Moreover,†resumed the hermit, “you will be sur-
prised to hear that diamond and gold finding is not
the most profitable employment in the country.
“The man who cultivates the ground is better off
than anybody. It is a fact, a very great fact, a fact
that you should get firmly fixed in your memory—
that in less than two years the exports of sugar and
coffee amounted to more than the value of all the
104 MARTIN RATTLER.
diamonds found in ezghty years. Yes, that is true.
But the people of Brazil are not well off They have
everything that is necessary to make a great nation ;
but we are not a great nation, far from it.â€
The hermit sighed deeply as he ceased speaking,
and fell into an abstracted frame of mind.
“It’s a great country intirely,†said Barney, knock-
ing the ashes out of his pipe, and placing that much-
loved implement carefully in his pocket—“a great
country; but there’s a tremendous big screw loose
somewhere.â€
“Tt seems curious to me,†said Martin, in a rumin-
ating tone of voice, “that people should not get on
better in a country in which there is everything that
man can desire to make him rich and happy. I
wonder what it wants. Perhaps it’s too hot, and the
people want energy of character.â€
“Want energy!†shouted the hermit, leaping from
his seat, and regarding his euests for a few moments
with a stern expression of countenance ; then, stretch-
ing forth his hand, he continued, in an excited tone:
“Brazil does not want energy; it has only one want
—it wants the Bible! When a country is sunk down
in superstition and ignorance and moral depravity, so
that the people know not right from wrong, there is
only one cure for her-—the Bible. Religion here is
MARTIN RATTLER. 105
a mockery and a shame; such as, if it were better
known, would make the heathen laugh in scorn. The
priests are a curse to the land, not a blessing. Per-
haps they are better in other lands—I know not;
but well I know they are many of them false and
wicked here. No truth is taught to the people—no
Bible is read in their ears; religion is not taught—_
even morality is not taught; men follow the devices
and desires of their own hearts, and there is no voice
raised to say, ‘You are doing wrong†My country is
sunk very low, and she cannot hope to rise, for the
word of her Maker is not in her hand. True, there
are a few, a very few Bibles in the great cities; but
that is all—that cannot save her hundreds of towns
and villages. Thousands of her people are slaves in
body—all, all are slaves in soul; and yet you ask me
what she wants. Ha! she wants ¢ruth—she wants
to be purged of falsehood. She has bones and muscles,
and arteries and veins—everything to make a strong
and healthy nation; but she wants blood—she has
no vital stream; yes, Brazil, my country, wants the
Bible!â€
CHAPTER XII.
A hunting expedition, in which are seen stones that can run, anc cows that
require no food—Besides a desperate encounter with a jaguar, and
other strange things.
OR many weeks Martin Rattler and his friend
k Barney O’Flannagan continued to dwell with
the hermit in his forest home, enjoying his entertain-
ing and instructive discourse, and joining with him in
the hunting expeditions which he undertook for the
purpose of procuring fresh food for his table. In these
rambles they made constant discoveries of something
new and surprising, in reference to both the vegetables
and animals of that extraordinary region of the earth.
They also had many adventures—some amusing and
some terrible—which we cannot enlarge on here, for
they would fill ten volumes such as this were they to
be all recorded in detail.
One day the hermit roused them earlier than usual
and told them to get ready, as he intended to go a
considerable distance that day, and he wished to reach
a particular spot before the heat of noon, So Martin
MARTIN RATTLER. 107
and Barney despatched breakfast in ag short a time
as possible, and the hermit read them a chapter out of
his large and well-thumbed Bible, after which they
equipped themselves for the chase.
When Martin and his friend escaped from the
pirates and landed on the coast of Brazil, they were
clothed in sailor-like costume, namely, white duck
trousers, coloured flannel shirts, blue jackets, round
straw hats, and strong shoes. This costume was not
very suitable for the warm climate in which they now
found themselves, so their hospitable friend the hermit
gave them two loose light cotton coats or jackets, of a
blue colour, and broad brimmed straw hats similar to
his own. He also gave them two curious garments
called ponchos, The poncho serves the purpose of
cloak and blanket. It is simply a square dark-
coloured blanket with a hole in the middle of it,
through which the head is thrust in rainy weather,
and the garment hangs down all round. At night
the poncho is useful as a covering. The hermit wore
a loose open hunting-coat, and underneath it a girdle,
in which was a long sharp knife and a brace of
pistols. His trousers were of blue-striped cotton.
He usually carried a double-barrelled gun over his
shoulder, and a powder-horn and bullet-bag were’
slung round his neck. Barney now procured from
108 MARTIN RATTLER.
this hospitable man a supply of powder and shot for
his large brass-mounted cavalry pistol. The hermit
also made him a present of a long hunting-knife ;
and he gave one of a smaller size to Martin. As
Martin had no weapon, the hermit manufactured for
him a stout bow and quiver full of arrows, with
which, after some practice, he became reasonably
expert.
Thus armed, they sallied forth, and following the
footpath that conducted from the door of the hut to
the brow of the hill opposite, they were soon buried
in the shades of the great forest. On this particular
morning, Barney observed that the hermit carried
with him a stout spear, which he was not usually in
the habit of doing. Being of an inquisitive disposi-
tion, he inquired the reason of his taking it.
“T expect to find a jaguar to-day,†answered the
hermit. “I saw him yesterday go down into the
small valley in which my cows grow. I will show
you my cows soon, Martin.â€
The hermit stopped short suddenly as he spoke,
and pointed to a large bird, about fifty yards in ad-
vance of them. It seemed to bear a particular ill-will
to a round rough stone which it pecked most energeti-
cally. After a few minutes the bird ceased its attacks
and flew off; whereupon the rough stone opened itself
MARTIN RATTLER. ; 109
out, and, running quickly away, burrowed into a little
hole and disappeared !
“That is an armadillo,’ remarked the hermit, con-
tinuing to lead the way through the woods. “It is
covered with a coat of mail, as you see; and when
enemies come it rolls itself up like a ball and lies like
a hard stone till they go away. But it has four little
legs, and with them it burrows so quickly that we
cannot dig it up, and must smoke it out of its hole—
which I do often, because it is very good to eat, as
you very well know.â€
While they continued thus to walk through the
woods conversing, Martin and Barney were again in-
terested and amused by the immense number of brill-
iant parrots and toucans which swooped about, chat-
tering from tree to tree, in large flocks. Sometimes
thirty or forty of the latter would come screaming
through the woods and settle upon the dark-green
foliage of a coffee-tree; the effect of which was to
give the tree the appearance of having been suddenly
loaded with ripe golden fruit. Then the birds would
catch sight of the travellers and fly screaming away,
leaving the tree dark-green and fruitless as before.
The little green parrots were the most outrageously
noisy things that ever lived. Not content with
screaming when they flew, they continued to shriek,
110 MARTIN RATTLER.
apparently with delight, while they devoured the
seeds of the gorgeous sun-flowers; and more than
once Martin was prompted to scatter a handful of
stones among them, as a hint to be less noisy; but
this only made them worse—like a bad baby, which,
the more you tell it to be quict, sets to work the
more earnestly to increase and add to the vigour of
its roaring. So Martin wisely let the parrots alone.
They also startled, in passing through swampy places,
several large blue herons and long-legged cranes; and
on many of the trees they observed the curious hang-
ing nests of a bird, which the hermit told them was
the large oriole. These nests hung in long strings
from the tops of the palm-trees, and the birds were
very actively employed moving about and chattering
round their swinging villages ; on seeing which Martin
could not help remarking that it would astonish the
colony not a little, if the top house were to give way
and let all the mansions below come tumbling to the
eround !
They were disappointed, however, in not seeing mon-
keys gambolling among the trees, as they had expected.
“Ah! my friends,†said the hermit, “travellers in
my country are very often disappointed. They come
here expecting to see everything all at once; but
although there are jaguars, and serpents, and bears,
MARTIN RATTLER. 1
and monkeys, plenty of them, as your ears can tell
you, these creatures keep out of the sight of man as
much as possible. They won’t come out of the woods
and show themselves to please travellers. You have
been very lucky since you arrived. Many travellers
go about for months together and do not see half so
much as you.â€
“That’s thrue,†observed Barney, with his head a
little on one side, and his eyes cast up in a sort of
neditative frown, as if he were engaged in subjecting
the hermit’s remarks to a process of severe philosophi-
cal contemplation ; “but I would be very well plazed
av the wild bastes would show themselves now and
then, for-—â€
Martin Rattler burst into aloud laugh, for Barney’s
upward glance of contemplation was suddenly trans-
formed into a gaze of intense astonishment, as he
beheld the blue countenance of a large red monkey
staring down upon him from amid the branches of an
overhanging tree. The monkey’s face expressed, if
possible, greater surprise than that of the Irishman,
and its mouth was partially open and thrust forward
in a sort of threatening and inquiring manner. There
seemed to be some bond of sympathy between the
monkey and the man, fer while zts mouth opencd his
mouth opened too.
112 MARTIN RATTLER.
« A-a-a-a-a—ah !†exclaimed the monkey.
A facetious smile overspread Barney’s face. “Och!
be all manes; the same to you, kindly,†said he,
taking off his hat and making a low bow.
The civility did not seem to be appreciated,
however; for the monkey put on a most indignant
frown and displayed a terrific double row of long
brilliant teeth and red gums, while it uttered a shriek
of passion, twisted its long tail round a branch, and
hurled itself, with a motion more like that of a bird
than a beast, into the midst of the tree and disappeared,
leaving Martin and Barney and the hermit each with
a very broad grin on his countenance.
The hunters now arrived at an open space where
there were several large umbrageous trees, and as it
was approaching mid-day they resolved to rest here
for a couple of hours. Birds and insects were
gradually becoming more and more silent, and soon
afterwards the only sounds that broke upon their ears
were the curious metallic notes of the urupongas, or
bell-birds, which were so like to the rapid beating of
a smith’s hammer on an anvil, that it was with the
greatest difficulty Barney was restrained from going
off by himself in search of the “smiddy.†Indeed he
began to suspect that the worthy hermit was deceiving
him, and was only fully convinced at last when he
MARTIN RATTLER, 118
saw one of the birds. It was pure white, about the
size of a thrush, and had a curious horn or fleshy
tubercle upon its head.
Having rested and refreshed themselves, they
resumed their journey a short time before the noisy
inhabitants of the woods recommenced their active
afternoon operations.
“Hallo! what’s that ?†cried Barney, starting back
and drawing his pistol, while Martin hastily fitted an
arrow to his bow. ;
Not ten paces in front of them a frightful monster
ran across their path, which seemed so hideous to
Martin that his mind instantly reverted to the fable
of St. George and the Dragon, and he almost expected
to see fire issuing from its mouth. Tt was a huge
lizard, with a body about three feet long, covered with
bright scales. It had a long, thick tail. Its head
was clumsy and misshapen, and altogether its aspect
was very horrible. Before either Martin or Barney
could fire, the hermit dropped his gun and spear,
sprang quickly forward, caught the animal by the
tail, and, putting forth his great strength to the ut-
most, swung it round his head and dashed its brains
out against a, tree, ‘
Barney and Martin could only stare with amaze-
ment.
114 MARTIN RATTLER.
“This we call an iguana,†said the hermit, as he
piled a number of heavy stones on the carcass to
preserve it from other animals. “1b is very good to
eat——as good as chicken, This is not a very big one;
- they are sometimes five feet’ long, but almost quite
harmless—not venomous at all; and the only means
he has to defend himself is the tail, which is very
powerful, and gives a tremendously hard blow. But,
as you see, if you catch him quickly he can do
nothing.â€
“Tes all very well for you, or even Barney here, to
talk of catching him by the tail,†said Martin, smiling ;
“but it would have puzzled me to swing that fellow
round my head.â€
“Arvah! ye'’re right, boy; I doubt if I could have
done it mesilf,’ said Barney.
“No fear,†said the hermit, patting Martin’s broad
shoulders as he passed him and led the way; “you
will be strong enough for that very soon—as strong
as me in a year or two.â€
They now proceeded down into a somewhat dark
and closely wooded valley, through which meandered
a small rivulet. Here they had some difficulty in
forcing their way through the dense underwood and
broad leaves, most of which seemed very strange to
Martin and his comrade, being so gigantic. There
MARTIN RATTLER. 115
were also many kinds of ferns, which sometimes
arched over their heads and completely shut out the
view, while some of them crept up the trees like
climbing-plants. Emerging from this, they came
upon a more open space, in the midst of which grew
a number of majestic trees.
“There are my cows!†said the hermit, pausing as
he spoke, and pointing towards a group of tall straight-
stemmed trees that were the noblest in appearance
they had yet seen. “Good cows they are,†he con-
tinued, going up to one and making a notch in the
bark with his axe; “they need no feeding or looking
after, yet, as you see, they are always ready to give
me cream.â€
While he spoke, a thick white liquid flowed from
the notch in the bark into a cocoa-nut drinking-cup,
which the hermit always carried at his girdle. Ina
few minutes he presented his visitors with a draught
of what they declared was most excellent cream.
The masseranduba, or milk-tree, as it is called, is
indeed one of the most wonderful of all the extra-
ordinary trees in the forests of Brazil, and is one
among many instances of the bountiful manner in
Which God provides for the wants of his creatures.
No doubt this might with equal truth be said of all
the gifts that a beneficent Creator bestows upon man-
116 MARTIN RATTLER.
kind; but when, as in the case of this milk-tree, the
provision for our wants comes in a singular and strik-
ing manner, it seems fitting and appropriate that we
should specially acknowledge the gift as coming from
the hand of Him who giveth us all things liberally to
enjoy.
The milk-tree rises with a straight stem to an
enormous height, and the fruit, about the size of a
small apple, is full of rich and juicy pulp, and is very
good. The timber, also, is hard, fine-grained, and
durable—particularly adapted for such works as are
exposed to the weather. But its most remarkable
peculiarity is the rich vegetable milk which flows in
abundance from it when the bark is cut. This milk
is so like to that of the cow in taste, that it can
scarcely be distinguished from it, having only a very
slight peculiarity of flavour, which is rather agreeable
than otherwise. In tea and coffee it has the same
effect as rich cream, and, indeed, is so thick that it
requires to be diluted with water before being used.
This milk is also employed as glue. It hardens when
exposed to the air, and becomes very tough and slightly
elastic, and is said to be quite as good and useful as
ordinary glue.
Having partaken of as much milk as they desired,
they continued their journey a little further, when
MARTIN RATTLER. 117
they came to a spur of the sierra, or mountain range,
that cuts through that part of the country. Here
the ground became more rugged, but still densely
covered with wood, and rocks lay piled about in
many places, forming several dark and gloomy caverns,
The hermit now unslung his gun and advanced to the
foot of a cliff, near the farther end of which there
were several caves, the mouths of which were partially
closed with long ferns and masses of luxuriant vege-
tation.
“Now we must be prepared,†said the hermit, feel-
ing the point of his spear. “I think there is a jaguar
here. I saw him yesterday, and I am quite sure he
will not go away till he tries to do some mischief. He
little knows that there is nothing here to hurt but me.â€
The hermit chuckled as he said this, and resting
his gun against the cliff near the entrance to the first
cave, which was a small one, he passed on to the next,
Holding the spear in his left hand, he threw a stone
violently into the cavern, Barney and Martin listened
and gazed in silent expectation ; but they only heard
the hollow sound of the falling stone as it dashed
against the sides of the cave, then all was still.
“Och, then, he’s off†eried Barney.
“Hush,†said Martin; “don’t speak till he has
tried the other cave.â€
118 MARTIN RATTLER.
Without taking notice of their remarks, the hermit
repeated the experiment at the mouths of two caverns
farther on, with the like result.
“Maybe the spalpeen’s hidin’ in the little cave
where ye laid down yer gun,†suggested Barney,
going towards the place as he spoke. “Och, then,
come here, friend; sure it must be the mouth of a
mine, for there’s two o’ the beautifullest di’monds I
iver—â€
Barney's speech was cut short by a low peculiar
sound, that seemed like the muttering of far-distant
thunder. At the same moment the hermit pulled him
violently back, and placing himself in a firm attitude
full in front of the cavern, held the point of the spear
advanced before him.
“Martin,†he whispered, “shoot an arrow straight
into that hole—quick !â€
Martin obeyed, and the arrow whizzed through the
aperture. Instantly there issued from it a savage
and tremendous roar, so awful that it seemed as if
the very mountain were bellowing and that the cavern
were its mouth. But not a muscle of the hermit’s
figure moved. He stood like a bronze statue, his
head thrown back and his chest advanced, with one
foot planted firmly before him and the spear pointing
towards the cave. It seemed strange to Martin that
MARTIN RATTLER. 119
a man should face what appeared to him unknown
danger so boldly and calmly ; but he did not consider
that the hermit knew exactly the amount of danger
before him. He knew precisely the manner in which
it would assail him, and he knew just what was
necessary to be done in order to avert it; and in
the strength of that knowledge he stood unmoved,
with a slight smile upon his tightly-compressed lips.
Scarcely had the roar ceased when it was repeated
with tenfold fierceness; the bushes and fern leaves
shook violently, and an enormous and beautifully-
spotted jaguar shot through the air as if it had been
discharged from a cannon’s mouth. The hermit’s eye
wavered not; he bent forward a hair’s-breadth ; the
glittering spear-point touched the animal’s breast,
pierced through it, and came out at its side below
the ribs.) But the force of the bound was too ereat
for the strength of the weapon: the handle snapped
in twain, and the transfixed jaguar struck down the
hermit and fell writhing upon him !
In the excitement of the moment Barney drew his
pistol from his belt and snapped it at the animal.
It was well for the hermit at that moment that
Barney had forgotten to prime his weapon; for
although he aimed at the jaguar’s skull, there is
no doubt whatever that he would have blown out the
120 MARTIN RATTLER.
hermit’s brains. Before he could make a second at-
tempt, Martin sprang towards the gun which leaned
against the cliff and running quickly up, he placed
the muzzle close to the jaguar’s ear and lodged a
bullet in its brain. All this was done in a few
seconds, and the hermit regained his legs just as the
animal fell dead. Fortunately he was not hurt,
having adroitly avoided the sharp claws of his
enemy.
“Arrah! Mister Hermit,†said Barney, wiping the
perspiration from his forehead, “ it’s yersilf that was
well-nigh done for this time, an’ no mistake. Did
iver I see sich a spring! an’ ye stud the charge jist
like a stone wall—niver moved a fut!â€
“Are you not hurt?†inquired Martin, somewhat
anxiously ; “your face is all covered with blood.â€
“ Yes, boy, but it is the blood of the jaguar; thanks
to you for your quick hand, I am not hurt at all.â€
The hermit washed his face in the neighbouring
brook, and then proceeded to skin the jaguar, the
carcass being worthless. After which they retraced
their steps through the woods as quickly as possible,
for the day was now far spent, and the twilight, as -
we have before remarked, is-so short in tropical lati-
tudes that travellers require to make sure of reaching
the end of the day’s journey towards evening, unless
MARTIN RATTLER. 12]
they choose to risk losing their way, and spending
the night in the forest.
They picked up the iguana in passing; and on
reaching the spot where the armadillo had burrowed,
the hermit paused and kindled a small fire over the
hole, by means of his flint, steel, and tinder-box. He
thus contrived to render the creature's habitation so
uncomfortable that it rushed hurriedly out; then,
observing that its enemies were waiting, it doubled
its head and tail together, and became the image of
a rough stone.
“ Poor thing,†said Martin, as the hermit killed it,
“that reminds me of the ostrich of the desert, which,
I'm told, when it is chased over the plains by men on
horseback, and finds that it cannot escape, thrusts
its head into a bush, and fancies, no doubt, that it
cannot be seen, although its great body is visible a
mile off!â€
“Martin,†said Barney, “this arth is full o° quare
craturs intirely.â€
“That's true, Barney; and not the least ‘quare’
among them is an Irishman, a particular friend of
mine!â€
“Hould yer tongue, ye spalpeen, or I'll put yer
head in the wather!â€
“T wish ye would, Barney, for it is terribly hot
122 MARTIN RATTLER.
and mosquito-bitten, and you couldn’t have suggested
anything more delightful. But here we are once
more at our forest home; and now for a magnificent
cup of coffee and a mandioca-cake.â€
“Not to mintion,†added Barney, “a juicy steak of
Igu Anny, an’ a tender chop o’ Army Dillo.â€
CHAPTER XIII.
Martin and Barney continue their travels, and sce strange things—Among
others, they see living jewels—They go to sce a festa— They fight and run
away.
ARTIN RATTLER and Barney O’Flannagan
M soon after this began to entertain a desire
to travel farther into the interior of Brazil, and behold
with their own eyes the wonders of which they had
heard so much from their kind and hospitable friend
the hermit. Martin was specially anxious to see the
great river Amazon, about which he entertained the
most romantic ideas—as well he might, for there is
not such another river in the world for size, and for
the many curious things connected with its waters
and its banks. Barney, too, was smitten with an
intense desire to visit the diamond mines, which he
fancied must be the most brilliant and beautiful sight
in the whole world; and when Martin asked him
what sort of place he expected to see, he used to say
that he “pictur’d in his mind a great many deep and
lofty caverns, windin’ in an’ out an’ round about,
124 MARTIN RATTLER.
with the sides and the floors and the ceilin’s all of a
blaze with glittering di’monds, an’ top’zes, an’ purls,
an’ what not; with Naigeurs be the dozen picking
them up in handfuls. An’ sure,†he would add, “if
we was wance there, we could fill our pockets in no
time, an’ then, hooray for ould Ireland! an’ live like
imperors for ivermore.â€
“But you forget, Barney, the account the hermit
has given us of the mines. He evidently does not
think that much is to be made of them.â€
“Och! niver mind the hermit. There’s always
good luck attends Barney O’Flannagan. An’ sure if
nobody wint for fear they would git nothing, all the
di’monds that iver came out o’ the mines would be
lyin’ there still, An’ didn’t he tell us there was wan
got only a short time since, worth I don’t know how
many thousand pounds? Arrah! if I don’t go to the
mines an’ git one the size o’ me head, I'll let ye rig
me out with a long tail an’ set: me adrift in the woods
for a blue-faced monkey.â€
It so happened that this was the time when the
hermit was in the habit of setting out on one of his
trading-trips ; and when Martin told him of the desire
that he and Barney entertained to visit the interior,
he told them that he would be happy to take them
along with him, provided they would act the part of
MARTIN RATTLER. 125
muleteers. To this they readily agreed, being only
too glad of an opportunity of making some return to
their friend, who refused to accept any payment for
his hospitality, although Barney earnestly begged of
him to accept of his watch, which was the only object
of value he was possessed of—and that wasn’t worth
much, being made of pinchbeck, and utterly incapable
of going! Moreover, he relieved their minds by
telling them that they would easily obtain employ-
ment as canoemen on the Amazon, for men were
very difficult to be got on that river to man the
boats; and if they could stand the heat, and were
willing to work like Indians, they might travel as far
as they pleased. To which Martin replied, in his
ignorance, that he thought he could stand anything ;
and Barney roundly asserted that, having been burnt
to a cinder long ago in the “East Injies,†it was im-
possible to overdo him any more.
Under these circumstances, therefore, they started
three weeks later to visit a populous town about
twenty miles off, from which they set out on their
travels with a string of heavily-laden mules, crossed
the low countries or campos lying near to the sea, and
began to ascend the sierras that divide this portion
of Brazil from the country which is watered by the
innumerable rivers that flow into the mighty Amazon.
126 MARTIN RATTLER.
The cavaleade consisted of ten mules, each with
two goodly-sized bales of merchandise on its back.
They were driven and attended to by Negroes, whose
costume consisted of a light cotton shirt with short
sleeves, and a pair of loose cotton drawers reaching
down to the knee. With the exception of a straw
hat this was all they wore. Martin, and Barney, and
the hermit each bestrode a mule, with a small bale
slung on either side, over the front of which their
legs dangled comfortably. They had ponchos with
them, strapped to the mules’ backs, and each carried
a clumsy umbrella to shield him from the fierce rays
of the sun; but our two adventurers soon became so
hardened and used to the climate, that they dispensed
with the umbrellas altogether.
The sierra or mountain range over which they
passed was about thirty miles in extent, being in
some places quite level and open, but in others some-
what rugged, and covered with large but thinly scat-
tered trees, the most common of which had fine dark-
green glossy leaves, with spikes of bright yellow
flowers terminating the branchlets. There were also
many peculiar shrubs and flowering plants, of a sort
that the travellers had never seen the like of in their
native land.
“How I wish,†said Martin with a sigh, as he rode
MARTIN RATTLER. 127
along beside his friend Barney, “that I knew some-
thing of botany.â€
Barney opened his eyes in surprise. “Arrah! it’s
too much of a philosopher ye are already, lad. What
good would it do ye to know all the hard names that
men have given to the flowers? Sure I wance wint
after the doctor o’ a ship, to carry his box for him
when he wint on what he called botanical excursions ;
and the poor cratur used to be pokin’ his nose for
iver down at the ground, an’ peerin’ through his
green spectacles at miserable bits 0’ plants, an’ niver
seemin’ to enjoy anything; when all the time J was
lookin’ far fornint me an’ all around me, an’ up at the
sky, seein’ ivery beautiful thing, and snifterin’ up the
sweet smells, an’ in fact enjoyin’ the whole univarse
—an’ my pipe to boot—like an intelligent cratur.â€
Barney looked round as he spoke with a bland, self-
satisfied expression of countenance, as if he felt that
he had given a lucid definition of the very highest
style of philosophy, and proved that he, Barney
O’Flannagan, was possessed of the same in no common
degree.
“Well, Barney,†rejoined Martin, “since you give
me credit for being a philosopher, I must continue to
talk philosophically. Your botanical friend took a
mecroscopic view of nature, while you took a telescopic
128 MARTIN RATTLER.
view of it. Each view is good, but both views are
better; and I can’t help wishing that I were more of
a philosopher than I am, especially in reference to
botany.â€
“Humph!†ejaculated Barney, who seemed not
quite to understand his young friend, “yer observa-
tions are remarkably thrue, and do ye great credit,
for yer years—Ah! Mr. Hermit, good luck to ye!
I'm glad to see that ye’ve got some consideration for
man and baste. I’m quite ready for my victuals,
and so’s my mule ;—aren’t you, avic?â€
Barney’s latter remark was addressed to hig patient
charger, from whose back he sprang as he spoke, and
slackened its girths.
Tt was now approaching mid-day, and the hermit
had pitched upon a large tree as a fitting spot for
rest and refreshment. Water had been brought up
the mountain in a huge calabash; but they did not
require to use it, as they found a quantity in the
hollow stump of a tree. There were several frogs
swimming about in this miniature lake; but it
was found to be fresh and clear and good notwith-
standing.
Towards evening they passed a string of mules
going towards the town which they had just left.
They were driven by Negroes, most of whom were
MARTIN RATTLER. 129
slaves, and nearly quite naked. A Brazilian mer-
chant, wearing a picturesque broad-brimmed, high-
crowned straw-hat, a poncho, and brown leather boots
armed at the heels with large sharp spurs, rode at the
head, and gave the strangers a surly nod of his head
as they passed. Soon after, they descended into the
plain, and came to a halt at a sort of road-side public-
house, where there was no sleeping accommodation,
but where they found an open shed in which travellers
placed their goods, and slung their hammocks, and
attended to themselves. At the venda, close beside it,
they purchased a large bag of farina, being short of
that necessary article of food, and then set to work
to prepare supper in the open air; while the merry
Negroes, who seemed to enjoy life most thoroughly,
laughed and sang as they removed the bales from the
mules’ backs and cooked their simple fare.
Barney's cooking propensities now came into full
play, and with the variety of fruits and vegetables
which the country afforded he exercised his ingenuity,
and produced several dishes of so savoury a nature
that the hermit was compelled to open his eyes in
amazement and smack his lips with satisfaction, being
quite unable to express his sentiments in words.
While thus busily and agreeably employed, they were
told by the owner of the venda that a jesta was being
9
130 MARTIN RATTLER.
celebrated at a village about a league distant from
where they stood.
“I should like to see it above all things,†said
Martin eagerly ; “could we not go?â€
The hermit frowned. “Yes, we can go, but it will
be to behold folly. Perhaps it will be a good lesson
from which much may be learned. We will go.â€
“Tt’s not a step that I'll budge till I’ve finished me
pipe,†said Barney, pulling away at that bosom friend
with unexampled energy. “To smoke,†he continued,
winking gently with one eye, “is the first law of
nature ; jist give me ten minutes more, an’ I’m your
man for anything.â€
Being a fine evening, they proceeded on foot. In
about an hour after setting out they approached the
village, which lay in a beautiful valley below them.
Sounds of mirth and music rose like a distant mur-
mur on the air, and mingled with the songs of birds
and insects. Then the sun went down, and in a few
minutes it grew dark, while the brilliant fire-flies
began their nocturnal gambols. Suddenly a bright
flame burst over the village, and a flight of magnifi-
cent rockets shot up into the sky, and burst in a
hundred bright and variously-coloured stars, which
paled for a few seconds the lights of nature. But
they vanished in a moment, and the clear stars shed
MARTIN RATTLER. 181
abroad their undying lustre, seeming, in their quiet,
unfading beauty, a gentle satire on the short-lived and
gairish productions of man.
“Mighty purty, no doubt,†exclaimed Barney. “Is
this the Imperor’s birth-day ?â€
“No,†replied the hermit, shaking his head ; “ that is
the way in which the false priests amuse the people.
The poor Indian and the Negro, and, indeed, the ig-
norant Brazilian, thinks it very grand; and the priests
let them think it is pleasing to the God of heaven.
Ah! here comes an old Negro; we will ask him.â€
Several country people, in varied and picturesque
costumes, hurried past the travellers towards the
village; and as they came to a foot-path that joined
the road, an old Negro approached them. Saluting
him in the Portuguese language, the hermit said,
“Friend, why do they let off rockets to-night ?â€
“Por Dios†(for God), answered the old man, look-
ing and pointing upwards with grave solemnity.
Without vouchsafing another word, he hurried away.
“So they think,†said the hermit, “and so they are
taught by the priests. Music, noise, and fire-works
please these ignorant people; and so the priests, who
are mostly as ignorant as the people, tell them it is a
good part of religious ceremony.†.
Presently a band of young girls came laughing and
132 MARTIN RATTLER.
singing along the road, They were dressed in pure
white, their rich black tresses being uncovered and
ornamented with flowers and what appeared to be
bright jewels.
“Hallo!†exclaimed Martin, gazing after them;
“what splendid jewels! Surely these must be the
daughters of very rich people.â€
“Och, but they’ve been at the dimond mines for
certain! Did iver ye sae the like?â€
The girls did indeed seem to blaze with jewels,
which not only sparkled in their hair, but fringed
their white robes, and were worked round the edges
of their slippers; so that a positive light shone around
their persons, and fell upon the path like a halo,
giving them more the appearance of lovely super-
natural beings than the daughters of earth.
“These jewels,†said the hermit, “were never
polished by the hands of men. They are fire-
flies.â€
“ Fire-flies!†exclaimed Martin and Barney simul-
taneously.
“Yes, they are living fire-flies. The girls very
often catch them and tie them up in little bits of
gauze, and put them, as you see, on their dresses and
in their hair. To my mind they seem more beautiful
far than diamonds. - Sometimes the Indians, when
MARTIN RATTLER. 133
they travel at night, fix fire-flies to their feet, and so
have good lamps to their path.â€
While Barney was expressing his surprise at this
information in very racy language, they entered the
village, and mingling with the throng of holiday-
keepers, followed the stream towards the grand
square.
The church, which seemed to be a centre of attrac-
tion, and was brilliantly illuminated, was a neat
wooden building with two towers. The streets of the
village were broad and straggling; and so luxuriant
was the vegetation, and so lazy the nature of the in-
habitants, that it seemed as if the whole place were
overgrown with gigantic weeds. Shrubs and creeping-
plants grew in the neglected gardens, climbed over the
palings, and straggled about the streets. Plants grew
on the tops of the houses, ferns peeped out under the
eaves; and, in short, on looking at it, one had the
feeling that ere long the whole place, people and all,
must be smothered in superabundant vegetation !
The houses were all painted white or yellow, with
the doors and windows bright green—just like
grown-up toys; and sounds of revelry, with now and
then the noise of disputation, issued from many of
them.
It is impossible to describe minutely the appearance
134 MARTIN RATTLER.
of the motley crowd through which our adventurers
elbowed their way, gazing curiously on the strange
scene, which seemed to them more like a dream
than a reality, after their long sojourn in the soli-
tudes of the forest. Processions headed by long-robed
priests with flambeaux and crucifixes; young girls in
light costumes and long white cotton shawls, selling
sweet cakes of mandioca flour and bonbons; swarthy
Brazilians, some in white jackets, loose cotton drawers,
and straw hats, others in brown leather boots and
ponchos ; Negroes in short white drawers and shirts,
besides many without any clothing above their waists ;
Indians from the interior, copper-coloured, and some
of them, fine-looking men, having only a strip of
cloth about their loins ;—such were the strange crew
whose loud voices, added to the whiz of rockets, squibs,
crackers, guns, and musical instruments, created a
deafening noise.
In the midst of the village there was a tree of such
enormous size that it quite took our travellers by
surprise. It was a wild fig-tree, capable of sheltering
a thousand persons under its shadow! Here a spirited
fandango was going on, and they stood for some time
watching the movements of the performers. Growing
tired of this, they wandered about until they came to
a less crowded part of the village, and entered a
MARTIN RATTLER. 135
pleasant grove of trees skirting the road by which
they had arrived. While sauntering here, enjoying
the cool night breeze and delicious perfume of flowers,
a woman uttered a piercing shriek near to them. It
was instantly followed by loud voices in altercation.
Ever ready to fly to the help of womankind, and,
generally, to assist in a “row,†Barney darted through
the bushes, and came upon the scene of action just in
time to see the white skirt of a female’s dress dis-
appear down an avenue, and to behold two Brazilians
savagely writhing in mortal strife. At the moment
he came up, one of the combatants had overcome the
other, and a fierce smile of triumph crossed his swarthy
countenance as he raised his gleaming knife.
“Och, ye murtherer! would ye attimpt that same ?â€
cried Barney, catching the man by the wrist and
hurling him on his back. The other sprang up on
being thus unexpectedly freed, and darted away ;
while the thwarted man uttered a yell of disappoint-
ment, and sprang like a tiger at Barney’s throat. A
blow, however, from the Ivishman’s fist, quietly de-
livered, and straight between the eyes, stretched the
Brazilian on the ground. At the same moment a
party of men, attracted by the cries, burst through
the bushes and surrounded the successful champion.
Seeing their countryman apparently dead upon the
186 MARTIN RATTLER.
ground, they rushed upon Barney in a body; but the
first who came within reach was floored in an instant,
and the others were checked in their career by the
sudden appearance of the hermit and Martin Rattler.
The noise of many voices, as of people hastening
towards them, was heard at the same time.
“We have no time to lose; do as I bid you,†whis-
pered the hermit. Whirling a heavy stick round his
head the hermit shouted the single word “ Charge !â€
and dashed forward.
Barney and Martin obeyed. Three Brazilians
went down like ninepins; the rest turned and fled
precipitately.
“Now, run for life!†cried the hermit, setting the
example. Barney hesitated to follow what he deemed
a cowardly flight, but the yells of the natives return-
ing in strong force decided the question. He and
Martin took to their heels-with right good will, and
in a few minutes the three friends were far on the
road which led to their night bivouae; while the
villagers, finding pursuit hopeless, returned to the
village, and continued the wild orgies of their festa.
CHAPTER XIV.
Cogitations and canoeing on the Amazon—Barney’s cxploit with an
alligator—Stubborn facts—Remarkable mode of sleeping.
T is pleasant, when the sun is bright, and the trees
[ are green, and when flowering shrubs and sweet-
smelling tropical trees scent the balmy atmosphere at
eventide, to lie extended at full length in a canoe, and
drop easily, silently, yet quickly down the current of
a noble river, under the grateful shadow of overhanging
foliage ; and to look lazily up at the bright blue sky
which appears in broken patches among the verdant
leaves, or down at the river in which that bright sky
and those green leaves are reflected, or aside at the
mud-banks where greedy vultures are searching for
prey and lazy alligators are basking in the sun; and
to listen, the while, to the innumerable cries and notes
of monkeys, toucans, parrots, orioles, bemtevi or fly-
catchers, white-winged and blue chatterers, and all
the myriads of birds and beasts that cause the forests
of Brazil, above all other forests in the world probably,
to resound with the gleeful songs of animated nature !
138 MARTIN RATTLER.
It is pleasant to be thus situated, especially when
a cool breeze blows the mosquitoes and other insects
off the water, and relieves you for a time from their
incessant attacks, Martin Rattler found it pleasant,
as he thus lay on his back with his diminutive pet
marmoset monkey seated on his breast quietly picking
the kernel out of a nut. And Barney O’Flannagan
found it pleasant, as he lay extended in the bow of
the canoe with his head leaning over the edge, gazing
abstractedly at his own reflected visage, while his
hands trailed through the cool water, and his young
dog—a shagey, indescribable beast with a bluff nose
and a bushy tail—watched him intently, as a mother
might watch an only child in a dangerous situation.
And the old, sun-dried, and storm-battered, and time-
shrivelled mulatto trader, in whose canoe they were
embarked, and whose servants they had become, found
it pleasant, as he sat there perched in his little
montaria, like an exceedingly ancient and overgrown
monkey, guiding it safely down the waters of the
great river of the Tocantins.
Some months have passed since we last parted from
our daring adventurers, During that period they had
crossed an immense tract of country, and reached the
head-waters of one of the many streams that carry
the surplus moisture of central Brazil into the Amazon.
MARTIN RATTLER. 139
Here they found an old trader, a free mulatto, whose
crew of Indians had deserted him—a common thing
in that country—and who gladly accepted their
services, agreeing to pay them a small wage. And
here they sorrowfully, and with many expressions of
good-will, parted from their kind friend and entertainer
the hermit. His last gift to Martin was the wonder-
fully small marmoset monkey before mentioned ; and
his parting souvenir to Barney was the blutf-nosed
dog that watched over him with maternal care,
and loved him next to itself ;—as well it might,
for if everybody had been of the same spirit as
Barney O’Flannagan, the Act for the Prevention of
Cruelty to Animals would never have been passed in
Britain.
It was a peculiar and remarkable and altogether
extraordinary monkey, that tiny marmoset. There
was a sort of romance connected with it, too; for it
had been the mother of an indescribably small infant-
monkey, which was killed at the time of its mother’s
capture. It drank coffee, too, like—like a Frenchman,
and would by no means retire to rest at night until
it had had its usual allowance. Then it would fold
its delicate little hands on its bosom, and close its
eyes with an expression of solemn grief, as if, having
had its last earthly wish gratified, it now resigned
140 MARTIN RATTLER.
itself to—sleep. Martin loved it deeply, but his love
was unrequited; for, strange to say, that small
monkey lavished all its affection on Barney’s shagey
dog. And the dog knew it, and was evidently proud
of it, and made no objection whatever to the monkey
sitting on his back, or his head, or his nose, or doing,
in fact, whatever it chose whenever it pleased. When
in the canoe, the marmoset played with Grampus, as
the dog was named ; and when on shore, it invariably
travelled on his back.
Martin used to lie in the canoe half asleep and
watch the little face of the marmoset, until, by some
unaccountable mental process, he came to think of
Aunt Dorothy Grumbit. Often did poor Martin
dream of his dear old aunt, while sleeping under the
shelter of these strange-leaved tropical trees and
surrounded by the wild sounds of that distant land,
until he dreamed himself back again in the old village.
Then he would rush to the well-known school, and
find all the boys there except Bob Croaker, who he
felt certain must be away drowning the white kitten;
and off he would go and catch him, sure enough, in
the very act, and would give him the old thrashing
over again, with all the additional vigour acquired
during his rambles abroad thrown into it. Then he
would run home in eager haste, and find old Mrs.
MARTIN RATTLER. 141
Grumbit hard at the one thousand nine hundred and
ninety-ninth pair of worsted socks; and fat Mr.
Arthur Jollyboy sitting opposite to her, dressed in the
old lady’s bed-curtain chintz and high-crowned cap,
with the white kitten in his arms and his spectacles
on his chin, watching the process with intense interest,
and cautioning her not to forget the “hitch†by any
means; whereupon the kitten would fly up in his
face, and Mr. Jollyboy would dash through the
window with a loud howl, and Mrs. Grumbit’s face
would turn blue, and, uncoiling an enormous tail, she
would bound shrieking after him in among the trees
and disappear! Martin usually wakened at this
point, and found the marmoset, gazing in his face
with an expression of sorrowful solemnity, and the
old sun-dried trader staring vacantly before him as
he steered his light craft down the broad stream of
the Tocantins.
The trader could speak little more English than
sufficed to enable him to say “ yes†and “no;†Barney
could speak about as much Portuguese as enabled
him to say “no†and “yes;†while Martin, by means
of a slight smattering of that language, which he had
picked up by ear during the last few months, mixed
now and then with a word or two of Latin, and
helped out by a clever use of the language of signs,
142 MARTIN RATTLER.
succeeded in becoming the link of communication
between the two.
For many weeks they continued to descend the
river; paddling energetically when the stream was
sluggish, and resting comfortably when the stream
was strong, and sometimes dragging their canoe over
rocks and sand-banks to avoid rapids—-passing many
villages and plantations of the natives by the way—
till at last they swept out upon the bosom of the
ereat Amazon river.
The very first thing they saw upon entering it was
an enormous alligator, fully eighteen feet long, sound
asleep on a mud-bank.
“Och! put ashore, ye Naygur,†cried Barney,
seizing his pistol and rising up in the bow of the
canoe. The old man complied quickly, for his spirit
was high and easily roused.
“Look out now, Martin, an’ hould back the dog for
fear he wakes him up,†said Barney, in a hoarse
whisper, as he stepped ashore and hastened stealthily
towards the sleeping monster, catching up a handful
of gravel as he went and ramming it down the barrel
of his pistol. It was a wonderful pistol that—an Irish
one by birth, and absolutely incapable of bursting, else
assuredly it would have gone, as its owner said, to
“smithereens†long ago.
MARTIN RATTLER. 148
Barney was not a good stalker. The alligator
awoke, and made for the water as fast as it could
waddle. The Irishman rushed forward close up, as it
plunged into the river, and discharged the compound
of lead and stones right against the back of its head.
He might as well have fired at the boiler of a steam-
engine. The entire body of an alligator—back and
belly, head and tail—is so completely covered with
thick hard scales, that shot has no effect on it; and
even a bullet cannot pierce its coat of mail, except in
one or two vulnerable places. Nevertheless the shot
had been fired so close to it that the animal was
stunned, and rolled over on its back in the water.
Seeing this, the old trader rushed in up to his chin
and caught it by the tail; but at the same moment
the monster recovered, and, turning round, displayed
its terrific rows of teeth, The old man uttered a
dreadful roar, and struggled to the land as fast as
he could; while the alligator, equally frightened, no
doubt, gave a magnificent flourish and splash with its
tail, and dived to the bottom of the river.
The travellers returned disgusted to their canoe,
and resumed their journey up the Amazon in
silence.
The vulnerable places about an alligator are the
soft parts under the throat and the joints of the legs.
144, MARTIN RATTLER.
This is well known to the jaguar, its mortal foe,
which attacks it on land, and fastening on these soft
parts, soon succeeds in killing it; but should the
alligator get the jaguar into its powerful jaws, or
catch it in the water, it is certain to come off the
conqueror.
The Amazon, at its mouth, is more like a wide
lake or arm of the sea than a river. Mention has
been already made of this noble stream in the hermit’s
story ; but it is worthy of more particular notice, for
truly the Amazon is in many respects a wonderful
river. It is the largest, though not quite the longest,
in the world. Taking its rise among the rocky
solitudes of the great mountain range of the Andes,
it flows through nearly four thousand miles of the
continent in an easterly direction, trending northward
towards its mouth, and entering the Atlantic Ocean
on the northern coast of South America, directly
under the equator. In its course it receives the
waters of nearly all the great rivers of central South
America, and thousands of smaller tributaries, so
that when it reaches the ocean its volume of water is
enormous. Some idea may be formed of its majestic
size from the fact that one of its tributaries—the
Rio Negro—is fifteen hundred miles long, and varying
in breadth, being a mile wide not far from its mouth, «
MARTIN RATTLER. 145
while higher up it spreads out in some places into
sheets of ten miles in width. The Madeira, another
tributary, is also a river of the largest size. The
Amazon is divided into two branches at its mouth by
the island of Marajo, the larger branch being ninety-
six miles in width. About two thousand miles from
its mouth it is upwards of a mile wide. So great is
the force of this flood of water that it flows into the
sea unmixed for nearly two hundred miles, The tide
affects the river to a distance of about four hundred
miles inland, and it is navigable from the sea for a
distance of three thousand miles inland.
On the north bank of the Amazon there are ranges
of low hills, partly bare and partly covered with
thickets. These hills vary from three hundred to a
thousand feet high, and extend about two hundred
miles inland. Beyond them the shores of the river
are low and flat for more than two thousand miles,
till the spurs of the Andes are reached.
During the rainy season the Amazon overflows all
its banks, like the Nile, for many hundreds of miles;
during which season, as Martin Rattler truly remarked,
the natives may be appropriately called aquatic
animals. Towns and villages, and plantations belong-
ing to Brazilians, foreign settlers, and half-civilized
Indians, occur at intervals throughout the whole
10
146 MARTIN RATTLER.
course of the river; and a little trade in dye-woods,
india-rubber, medicinal drugs, Brazil nuts, coffee, ete.,
is done, but nothing to what might and ought to be,
and perhaps would be, were this splendid country in
the hands of an enterprising people. But the Ama-
zonians are lazy, and the greater part of the resources
of one of the richest countries in the world is totally
neglected.
“Arrah!†said Barney, scratching his head and
wrinkling his forehead intensely, as all that we have
just written, and a great deal more, was told to him
by a Scotch settler whom he found superintending a
cattle estate and a saw-mill on the banks of the
Amazon—* faix, then, I’m jist as wise now as before
ye begun to spake. I’ve no head for fagures what-
sumdiver; an’ to tell me that the strame is ninety-six
miles long and three thousand miles broad at the
mouth, and sich like ealcerlations, is 0’ no manner
o’ use, and jist goes in at wan ear an’ out at the
tother.â€
Whereupon the Scotch settler smiled and _ said,
“ Well, then, if ye can remember that the Amazon is
longer than all Europe is broad; that it opens up to
the ocean not less than ten thousand miles of the
interior of Brazil; and that, comparatively speaking,
no use is made of it whatever, ye'll remember
MARTIN RATTLER. 147
enough to think about with profit for some time to
come.â€
And Barney did think about it, and ponder it,
and revolve it in his mind, for many days after,
while he worked with Martin and the old trader at
the paddles of their montaria. They found the work
of canoeing easier than had been anticipated; for
during the summer months the wind blows steadily
up the river, and they were enabled to hoist their
mat-sail and bowl along before it against the stream.
Hotels and inns there were none—for Brazil does
not boast of many such conveniences, except in the
chief towns—so they were obliged, in travelling, to
make use of an empty hut or shed, when they chanced
to stop at a village, and to cook their own victuals.
More frequently, however, they preferred to encamp
in the woods, slinging their hammocks between the
stems of the trees, and making a fire sometimes, to
frighten away the jaguars, which, although seldom
seen, were often heard at night. They met large
canoes and montarias occasionally coming down the
stream, and saw them hauled up on shore, while their
owners were cooking their breakfast in the woods ;
and once they came upon a solitary old Indian in a
very curious position. They had entered a small
stream in order to procure a few turtles’ eggs, of
148 MARTIN RATTLER.
which there were many in that place buried in the
sand-banks. On turning a point where the stream
was narrow and overhung with bushes and trees
they beheld a canoe tied to the stem of a tree, and a
hammock slung between two branches overhanging
the water. In this an old Indian lay extended, quite
naked and fast asleep! The old fellow had grown
weary with paddling his little canoe, and finding
the thicket along the river’s banks so impenetrable
that he could not land, he slung his hammock over
the water, and thus quietly took his siesta. A flock
of paroquets were screaming like little green demons
Just above him, and several alligators gave him a
passing glance as they floundered heavily in the
water below; but the red man cared not for such
trifles. Almost involuntarily Martin began to hum
the popular nursery rhyme,—
‘* Hushy ba, baby, on the tree top;
When the wind blows the cradle will rock.â€
“ Arrah, if he was only two foot lower, its thirty
pair o’ long teeth would be stuck into his flank in
wan minute, or I’m no prophet,†said Barney, with a
broad grin.
“Suppose we give him a touch with the paddle in
ee ete oe
passing,†suggested Martin.
MARTIN RATTLER. 149
At this moment Barney started up, shaded his eyes
with his hand, and after gazing for a few seconds at
some object ahead of the canoe, he gave utterance
to an exclamation of mingled surprise and conster-
nation.
CHAPTER XV.
The great anaconda’s dinner—Barney gets a fright—Turtles’ eygs—A satis-
factory “blow out†—Senhor Antonio’s nlantation—Preparations for o
great hunt.
HE object which called forth the ery from ou:
Irish friend, as related in the last chapter,
was neither more nor less than a serpent of dinien-
sions more enormous than Barney had ever before
conceived of. It was upwards of sixteen feet long,
and nearly as thick as a man’s body; but about
the neck it was three times that size. This serpent
was not, indeed, of the largest size. In South
America they grow to nearly forty feet in length.
But it was fabulously gigantic in the eyes of our
adventurers, who had never seen a serpent of any
kind before.
“Qh!†cried Martin eagerly, “that must be an
anaconda. Is it not?†he inquired, turning to the
old trader.
“Yees; it dead,†was the short reply.
“So it is!†cried Martin, who, on a nearer
MARTIN RATTLER. 151
approach, observed that the brute’s body was cut
in two just below the swelling at the neck.
“Now, did ye iver,’ cried Barney with increased
surprise, “see a sarpint with a cow’s horns growin’
out at its mouth? Put ashore, old boy; we must
have a ’vestigation o’ this re-markable cratur.â€
The canoe was soon aground, and in another
minute the three travellers were busily engaged in
turning over the carcass of the huge reptile, which
they found, to the amazement of Martin and Barney,
had actually swallowed an ox whole, with the excep-
tion of the horns, which protruded from its mouth !
After much questioning, in bad Portuguese, broken
English, and remarkable signs, Martin succeeded in
drawing from the old trader the information that
anacondas of a large size are often in the habit of
thus bolting horses and oxen at a mouthful.
There is not the slightest exaggeration in this
fact. Readers who are inclined to disbelieve ib may
refer to the works of Wallace and Gardner on Brazil
—authorities which cannot be doubted.
The reptile commences by patiently watching until
an unfortunate animal strays near to where it is
lying, when it darts wpon it, encircles it in its massive
coils, and crushes it to death in an instant. Then it
squeezes the body and broken bones into a shapeless
152 MARTIN RATTLER.
mass; after which it licks the carcass all over, and
covers it with a thick coating of saliva. Having
thus prepared its mouthful, the anaconda begins at
the tail and gradually engulfs its victim, while its
elastic jaws, and throat, and stomach are distended
sufficiently to let it in; after which it lies in a torpid
state for many weeks, till the morsel is digested, when
it is ready for another meal. A horse goes down
entire, but a cow sticks at the horns, which the ana-
conda cannot swallow. They are allowed to protrude
from its mouth until they decay and drop off.
They were at a loss at first to account for the
creature being killed, but the old trader suggested
that it had been found in a torpid state and slain by
the Indian whom they had seen a short time ago
enjoying his siesta among the trees.
Having cut it open, in order to convince themselves
beyond a doubt that it had swallowed an entire ox,
Martin and the old trader re-embarked in the canoe,
and Barney was on the point of joining them when
the bushes close beside him were slightly stirred.
Looking quickly round, he beheld the head and the
glittering eyes of another anaconda, apparently as
large as the dead one, ready to dart upon him—at
least so he fancied; but he did not wait to give it a
chance. He fled instantly, and sprang towards the
MARTIN RATTLER. 153
boat, which he nearly upset as he leaped into it, and
pushed out into the stream. On reaching the middle of
the river they looked back, but the anaconda was gone.
Soon after this they came to a long sand-bank,
where the old trader said they should find as many
turtles’ eggs as they wished for, although to Barney
and Martin there seemed to be nothing on the bank at
all. The fresh-water turtle of the Amazon, of which
there are various species, is one of the most useful of
reptiles. Its flesh supplies abundance of good food ;
and the eggs, besides being eaten, afford an excellent
oil. The largest species grow to the length of three
feet, and have a flattish oval shell of a dark colour,
and quite smooth. Turtles lay their eggs about
the beginning of September, when the sand-banks
begin to be uncovered. They scrape deep holes for
them, and cover them carefully over, beating down
the sand quite flat, and walking across the place
several times, for the purpose of concealment. The
egos are then left to be hatched by the heat of the
sun. But, alas for the poor turtles! men are too
clever for them. The eggs are collected by the
natives in thousands, and, when oil is to be made of
them, they are thrown into a canoe, smashed and
mixed up together, and left to stand, when the oil
rises to the top, and is skimmed off and boiled. It
154 , MARTIN RATTLER.
keeps well, and is used both for lamps and cooking.
Very few of the millions of eggs that are annually
laid arrive at maturity.
When the young turtles issue forth and run to the
water, there are many enemies watching for them.
Great alligators open their jaws and swallow them by
hundreds; jaguars come out of the forests and feed
upon them; eagles and buzzards and wood ibises are
there, too, to claim their share of the feast; and, if
they are fortunate enough to escape all these, there
are many large and ravenous fishes ready to seize
them in the stream.. It seems a marvel that any
escape at all.
In a few minutes the old trader scraped up about
a hundred eggs, to the immense satisfaction of Martin
and Barney. Then he took a bow and arrow from
the bottom of the montaria and shot a large turtle in
the water, while his companions kindled a fire, in-
tending to dine. Only the nose of the turtle was
visible above water, but the old man was so expert
in the use of the bow that he succeeded in transfixing
the soft part of the animal’s neck with an arrow,
although that part was under water. It was a large
turtle, and very fat and heavy, so that it was with
difficulty the trader lifted it upon his old shoulders and
bore it in triumph to the spot where his companions
MARTIN RATTLER. 155
were busily engaged with their cooking operations.
Turtles are frequently shot with the arrow by the
natives; they are also taken in great numbers with
the hook and the net.
Dinner was soon ready. Barney concocted an
immense and savoury omelet, and the old trader
cooked an excellent turtle-steak, while Martin pre-
pared a junk of jaguar meat, which he roasted, being
curious to taste it, as he had been told that the
Indians like it very much. It was pretty good, but
not equal to the turtles’ eggs. The shell of the egg
is leathery, and the yolk only is eaten. The Indians
sometimes eat them raw, mixed with farina. Cakes
of farina, and excellent coffee, concluded their repast ;
and Barney declared he had never had such a satis-
factory “blow out†in his life; a sentiment with
which Martin entirely agreed, and the old trader—if
one might judge from the expression of his black
countenance—sympathized.
For many weeks our adventurers continued to
ascend the Amazon, sometimes sailing before the
wind; at other times, when it fell calm, pushing the
montaria up the current by means of long poles, or
advancing more easily with the paddles. Occasionally
they halted for a day at the residence of a wealthy
cacao planter, in order to sell him some merchandise ;
156 MARTIN RATTLER.
for which purpose the canoe was unloaded, and the
bales were opened out for his inspection. Most of
these planters were Brazilians, a few were Yankee
adventurers, and one or two were Scotch and English ;
but nearly all had married Brazilian ladies, who, with
their daughters, proved good customers to the old
trader. Some of these ladies were extremely “ purty
craturs,†as Barney expressed it; but most of them
were totally uneducated and very ignorant—not
knowing half so much as a child of seven or eight
years old in more favoured lands. They were very
fond of fine dresses and ornaments, of which consider-
able supplies were sent to them from Europe and the
United States, in exchange for the valuable produce
of their country. But, although their dresses were
fine and themselves elegant, their houses were gener-
ally very poor affairs—made: of wood and thatched
with broad leaves; and it was no uncommon thing to
see a lady, who seemed from her gay dress to be
fitted for a drawing-room, seated on an earthen floor.
But there were all sorts of extremes in this strange
land; for at the next place they came to, perhaps,
they found a population of Negroes and Indians, and
most of the grown-up people were half naked, while
all the children were entirely so.
At one plantation, where they resolved to spend a
MARTIN RATTLER. 157
few days, the owner had a pond which was much fre-
quented by alligators. These he was in the habit of
hunting periodically, for the sake of their fat, which
he converted into oil. At the time of their arrival
he was on the eve of starting on a hunting expedition
to the lake, which was about eight miles distant; so
Barney and Martin determined to go and “see the
fun,†as the latter said.
“ Martin, lad,’ remarked Barney, as they followed
the Negro slave who had been sent by Senhor
Antonio, the planter, to conduct them to the lake,
while he remained behind for an hour or two to
examine the bales of the old trader, “this is the
quarest country, I believe, that iver was made. What
with bastes, and varmints, and riptiles, and traes, and
bushes, and rivers, it bates all creation.â€
“Certainly it does, Barney ; and it is a pity there
are so few people in it who know how to make use of
the things that are scattered all around them. Tm
inclined to think the hermit was right when he said
that they wanted the Bible. They are too far sunk
in laziness and idleness to be raised up by anything
else. Just look,†continued Martin, glancing round,
“what a wonderful place this is! It seems as if all
the birds and curious trees in Brazil had congregated
here to meet us.â€
158 MARTIN RATTLER.
“So’t does,†said Barney, stopping to gaze on the
scene through which they were passing, with an ex-
pression of perplexity on his face, as if he found the
sight rather too much even for jis comprehension.
Besides the parrots and scarlet and yellow macaws,
and other strange-looking birds which we have else-
where mentioned, there were long-tailed light-coloured
cuckoos flying about from tree to tree, not calling
like the cuckoo of Europe at all, but giving forth a
sound like the creaking of a rusty hinge; there were
hawks and buzzards of many different kinds, and red-
breasted orioles in the bushes, and black vultures
flying overhead, and Muscovy ducks sweeping past
with whizzing wings, and flocks of the great wood-ibis
sailing in the air on noiseless pinions, and hundreds
of other birds that it would require an ornithologist
to name; and myriads of insects—especially ants and
spiders, great and small—that no entomologist could
chronicle in a life-time,—all these were heard and
seen at once; while of the animals that were heard,
but not so often seen, there were black and spotted
jaguars, and pacas, and cotias, and armadillos, and
deer, and many others that would take pages to
enumerate and whole books to describe.
But the noise was the great point. That was the -
thing that took Martin and Barney quite aback,
MARTIN RATTLER. 159
although it was by no means new to them; but they
could not get used to it And no wonder! Ten
thousand paroquets shrieking passionately, like a
hundred knife-grinders at work, is no joke ; especially
when their melodies are mingled with the discordant
eries of herons, and bitterns, and cranes, and the
ceaseless buzz and hum of insects, like the bagpipe’s
drone, and the dismal croaking of boat-bills and frogs
—one kind of which latter, by the way, doesn’t croak
at all, but whéstles, ay, better than many a bird!
The universal hubbub is tremendous. I tell you,
reader, that you don’t understand it, and you can’t
understand it; and if, after I had used the utmost
excess of exaggerated language to convey a correct
impression of the reality, you were to imagine that
you really did understand it, you would be very
lamentably mistaken—that’s all !
Nevertheless, you must not run away with the
idea that the whole empire of Brazil is like this.
There are dark thick solitudes in these vast forests
which are solemn and silent enough at times, and
there are wide grassy campos and great sandy plains
where such sounds are absent. Yet there are also
thousands of such spots as I have just described,
where all nature, in earth, air, and water, is instinct
with noisy animal life.
160 MARTIN RATTLER.
After two hours’ walk, Martin and his companion
reached the lake, and here active preparations were
making for the alligator hunt.
“Ts that the only place ye have to spind the night
in, Sambo?†said Barney to their conductor, as he
pointed to a wooden shed near which some fifteen
or twenty Negro slaves were overhauling the fishing
tackle.
« Vis, massa,†answered the black, showing his
white teeth; “dat is de hottle of dis great city.â€
Sambo could speak a little English, having wrought
for several years on the coffee plantation of a Yankee
settler. He was a bit of a wag, too, much to the
indignation of his grave master, the Senhor Antonio,
who abhorred jesting.
“Ye're too cliver, avic,†said Barney, with a
patronizing smile; “take care ye don’t use up yer
intellect too fast. It hurts the constitution in the
long-run.â€
“J say, Barney,†cried Martin, who had gone ahead
of his companions, “come here, man, and just look at
this pond. It’s literally crammed full of alligators.â€
“ Musha, but there’s more alligators than wather, I
belave!†exclaimed Barney.
The pond was indeed swarming with these fero-
cious reptiles, which were constantly thrusting their
MARTIN RATTLER. 161
ugly snouts above the surface, and then disappearing
with a flourish of their powerful tails. During the
rainy season this lake was much larger, and afforded
ample room for its inhabitants; but at the height of
the dry season, which it was at this time, there was
little water, and it was much overstocked. When
alligators are thus put upon short allowance of water
they frequently bury themselves in the wet mud, and
lie dormant for a long time, while the water continues
to retire and leaves them buried. But when the first
shower of the rainy season falls, they burst open their
tomb and drag their dry bodies to the lake or river
on whose margin they went to sleep.
An hour or two later the Senhor Antonio arrived,
but as it was getting dark nothing could be done
until the following morning; so they slung their
hammocks under the wooden shed on the margin of
the lake, and, in order to save themselves as much as
possible from the bites of the tormenting mosquitoes,
went to sleep with their heads tied up in their hand-
kerchiefs and their hands thrust into their breeches
pockets! The occasional splash and snort of con-
tending alligators, about twenty yards off, varied the
monotony of the hours of darkness, while the frogs
and cranes and jaguars sang their lullaby.
11
CHAPTER XVI.
An alligator hunt—Remarkable explosions—The rainy season ushered in by
an awful resurrection.
T sunrise an expressive shout in Portuguese set
A the black slaves on their feet, and after a
hasty breakfast of alligator-tail and farina they com-
menced operations. Alligator-tail is by no means
bad food, and after the first mouthful—taken with
hesitation and swallowed with difficulty—Martin and
Barney both pronounced it “capital†Sambo, who
had cooked the delicate morsel, and stood watching
them, smacked his lips and added, “ Fuss-rate.â€
All being now ready for the hunt, a number of
Negroes entered the water, which was nowhere very
deep, with long poles in their hands. This appeared
to Martin and Barney a very reckless and dangerous
thing to do, as no doubt it was. Nevertheless, ac-
cidents, they were told, very rarely happened.
Sambo, who was the overseer of the party, was the
first to dash up to the middle in the water. “ Hi,â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 163
exclaimed that dingy individual, making a torrent of
remarks in Portuguese, while he darted his long pole
hither and thither; then, observing that Martin and
Barney were gazing at him open-mouthed, he shouted,
“Look out, boys! here ‘im comes! Take care, ole
feller, or he jump right down you’ throat! hi-i-i!â€
As he spoke, a large alligator, having been rudely
stirred up from his muddy bed, floundered on the sur-
face of the lake, and Sambo instantly gave it a thump
over the back and a blow under the ribs, which had
the effect of driving it in the direction of the shore.
Here a number of Negroes were ready for him, and the
moment he came within reach a coil of rope with a noose
on the end of it, called a lasso, was adroitly thrown
over the reptile’s head; ten or twelve men then hauled
the lasso and dragged it ashore amid shouts of triumph.
This alligator was twenty feet long, with an enormous
misshapen head and fearful rows of teeth that were
terrible to behold. The monster did not submit to be
captured, however,without a struggle; and the Negroes
grew wild with excitement as they yelled and leaped
madly about, seeking to avoid its dangerous jaws and
the blows of its powerful tail. After some trouble,
a second lasso was thrown over the tail, which was
thus somewhat restrained in its movements; and
Sambo, approaching cautiously with an axe, cut a deep
164 MARTIN RATTLER.
gash just at the root of that formidable appendage,
which rendered it harmless. “ Hi-i,†shouted Sambo
in triumph, as he sprang towards the animal’s head
and inflicted a similar gash in the neck; “dare, you
quite finish, ole feller.â€
“Musha, but that’s thrue!†ejaculated Barney, who
stood staring at the whole proceeding like one ina
trance. “Did ye iver git a bite, Sambo?â€
Barney received no answer, for his sable friend was
already up to his waist in the water with five or six
of his brethren, who were flourishing their long poles
and driving the snorting alligators towards the shore,
where their comrades, with lassos and harpoons,
awaited them. Sometimes they harpooned the al-
ligators, and then fastening lassos to their heads and
tails, or to a hind leg, dragged them ashore; at other
times they threw the lasso over their heads at once,
without taking the trouble to harpoon them, It was:
a terrible and a wonderful sight to witness the Negroes
in the very midst of a shoal of these creatures, any
one of which could have taken a man into his jaws
quite easily, whence, once between these long saw-like
rows of teeth, no man could have escaped to tell how
sharp they were. The creatures were so numerous
that it was impossible to thrust a pole into the mud
without stirring up one of them; but they were so
MARTIN RATTLER. 165
terrified at the sudden attack and the shouts of the
Negroes, that they thought only of escape.
Suddenly there arose a great cry. One of the
lassos had snapped, and the alligator was floundering
back into the water, when Sambo rushed in up to
the armpits and caught the end of the rope. At the
same moment two alligators made at the Negro with
open jaws. It is probable that the animals went in
his direction by mere accident, and would have
brushed past him in blind haste; but to Martin and
Barney it seemed as if the poor man’s fate were sealed,
and they uttered a loud shout of horror as they
bounded simultaneously into the water, not knowing
what to do, but being unable to restrain the impulse
to spring to Sambo’s aid. Fortunately, however, one
of the other Negroes was near Sambo. He sprang
forward and dealt the alligators two tremendous blows
with his pole on their snouts, right and left, which
turned them off. Then other Negroes came up, laid
hold of Sambo, who would not let go his hold and
was being dragged into deep water, caught the end of
the rope, and in ten minutes hauled their victim to
the shore, where it was quickly despatched in the usual
manner.
By this time about a dozen alligators, varying from
ten to twenty feet in length, had been captured; and
166 MARTIN RATTLER.
Barney at length became so bold that he requested to
be allowed to try his hand at throwing the lasso, the
dexterous use of which by the Negroes had filled him
with admiration. A loud burst of laughter greeted
this proposal, and Sambo showed a set of teeth that
might have made even the alligators envious, as he
handed the Irishman a coil of line.
“Now don’t miss, Barney,†cried Martin, laughing
heartily, as his comrade advanced to the edge of the
lake and watched his opportunity. “Mind, your credit
as an expert hunter is at stake.â€
The Senhor Antonio stood close behind the Irishman,
with his arms folded and a sarcastic smile on his
countenance.
“Don’t send it down him’s throat,†yelled Sambo.
“Hi-i; dat’s de vay to swing um round. Stir um up,
boys !—poke um up, villains, hi!â€
The Negroes in the water obeyed with frantic
glee, and the terrified monsters surged about in all
directions, so that Barney found it almost impossible
to fix his attention on any particular individual. At
length he made up his mind, whirled the coil round
his head, discharged the noose, caught the Senhor An-
tonio round the neck, and jerked him violently to the
ground !
There was a simultaneous pause of horror among
MARTIN RATTLER. 167
the slaves; but it was too much for their risible
faculties to withstand. With one accord they rushed
howling into the water to conceal their laughter, and
began to stir up and belabour the alligators with their
poles, until the surface of the lake was a sheet of
foam.
Meanwhile the Senhor Antonio sprang to his feet
and began to bluster considerably in Portuguese; but
poor Barney seemed awfully crestfallen, and the deep
concern which wrinkled his face, and the genuine re-
egret that sounded in the tones of his voice, at length
soothed the indignant Brazilian, who frowned gravely,
and waving his hand, as if to signify that Barney had
his forgiveness, he stalked up to the shed, lighted a
cigarito, and lay down in his hammock.
“Well!†said Martin in an under-tone, “you did
it that time, Barney. I verily thought the old fellow
was hanged. He became quite livid in the face.â€
“Och! bad luck to the lasso, say I. May I niver
more see the swate groves 0’ Killarney if iver I meddle
with wan again.â€
“Hi-i; you is fuss-rate,†said Sambo, as he and his
comrades returned and busied themselves in cutting
up the dead alligators, “You beat de Niggers all to
noting. Not any of dis yere chiles eber lasso Sen‘or
Antonio yet; no, neber!â€
168 MARTIN RATTLER.
It was some time before the Negroes could effectually
subdue their merriment, but at length they succeeded,
and applied themselves vigorously to the work of
cutting out the fat. The alligators were all cut open,
a work of no small difficulty owing to the hard scales
which covered them as with coats of mail; then the
fat, which accumulates in large quantities about the
intestines, was cut out and made up into packets in
the skins of the smaller ones, which were taken off
for this purpose.
These packets were afterwards carried to the
senhor’s dwelling, and the fat melted down into oil,
which served for burning in lamps quite as well as
train oil. The flesh of a smaller species of alligator,
some of which were also taken, is considered excellent
food; and while the Negroes were engaged in their
work, Barney made himself useful by kindling a large
fire and preparing a savoury dish for “all hands,â€
plentifully seasoned with salt and pepper, with which
condiments the country is well supplied, and of which
the people are exceedingly fond.
There was also caught in this lake a large species
of fish called pirarucu, which, strangely enough, found
it possible to exist in spite of alligators. They were
splendid creatures, from five to six feet long, and
covered with large scales more than an inch in
MARTIN RATTLER. 169
diameter, which were beautifully marked and spotted
with red. These fish were most delicately flavoured,
and Barney exerted his talents to the utmost in order
to do them justice. Martin also did his best to prove
himself a willing and efficient assistant, and cleaned
and washed the pirarucu steaks and the junks of alli-
gator-tail to admiration. In short, the exertions of
the two strangers in this way quite won the hearts of
the Negroes, and after dinner the Senhor Antonio had
quite recovered his good-humour,
While staying at this place Martin had an oppor-
tunity of seeing a great variety of the curious fish
with which the Amazon is stocked. These are so
numerous that sometimes, when sailing up stream with
a, fair wind, they were seen leaping all round the canoe
in shoals, so that it was only necessary to strike the
water with the paddles in order to kill a few.
The peixe boi, or cow-fish, is one of the most curious
of the inhabitants of the Amazon. It is about six
feet long, and no less than five feet in circumference
at its thickest part. It is a perfectly smooth and
what we may call dumpy fish, of a: leaden colour, with
a semicircular flat tail, and a large mouth with thick
fleshy lips, resembling those of a cow. There are stiff
bristles on the lips, and a few scattered hairs over the
body. It has two fins just behind the head, and
170 MARTIN RATTLER.
below these, in the females, there are two breasts, from
which good white milk flows when pressure is applied,
The cow-fish feeds on grass at the borders of rivers
and lakes; and when suckling its young, it carries it
in its fins or flippers, and clasps the little one to its
breast, just as a mother clasps her baby! It is har-
pooned and taken for the sake of its fat, from which
oil is made. The flesh is also very good, resembling
beef in quality, and it was much relished by Martin
and Barney, who frequently dined on beef-steaks cut
from this remarkable cow-fish.
There was also another fish which surprised our
adventurers not a little the first time they met with
it. One evening Senhor Antonio had ordered a net
to be thrown into the river, being desirous of procur-
ing a few fresh fish for the use of his establishment.
The Indians and Negroes soon after commenced
dragging, and in a few minutes afterwards the sandy
bank of the river was strown with an immense
variety of small fish, among which were a few of a
larger kind. Martin and Barney became excited as
they saw them leaping and spluttering about, and ran
in amongst them to assist in gathering them into
baskets. But scarcely had the latter advanced a few
steps when there was a loud report, as if a pistol had
gone off under his feet.
MARTIN RATTLER. 171
“ Hallo!†exclaimed the Irishman, leaping two feet
into the air. On his reaching the ground again a
similar explosion occurred, and Barney dashed aside,
overturning Martin in his haste. Martin’s heel caught
on a stone, and he fell flat on the ground, when in-
stantly there was a report as if he had fallen upon
and burst an inflated paper bag. The natives laughed
loud and long, while the unfortunate couple sprang
up the bank, half inclined to think that an earthquake
was about to take place. The cause of their fright
was then pointed out. It was a species of small fish
which has the power of inflating the fore part of its
body into a complete ball, and which, when stamped
upon, explodes with a loud noise. There were great
numbers of these scattered among the other fish, and
also large quantities of a little fish armed with long
spines, which inflict a serious wound when trodden
upon.
At this place adventures on a small scale crowded
upon our travellers so thickly that Martin began to
look upon sudden surprises as a necessary of life, and
Barney said that “if it wint on any longer he feared
his eyebrows would get fixed near the top of his head,
and niver more come down.â€
One evening, soon after their departure from the
residence of Senhor Antonio, the old trader was sitting
172 MARTIN RATTLER.
steering in the stern of his canoe, which was running
up before a pretty stiff breeze. Martin was lying on
his back, as was his wont in such easy circumstances,
amusing himself with Marmoset, and Barney was re-
clining in the bow talking solemnly to Grampus, when
suddenly the wind ceased and it became a dead calm.
The current was so strong that they could scarcely
paddle against it, so they resolved to go no further
that night, and ran the canoe ashore on a low point
of mud, intending to encamp under the trees, no human
habitation being near them. The mud-bank was hard
and dry, and cracked with the heat, for it was now
the end of the dry season, and the river had long since
retired from it.
“Not a very comfortable place, Barney,†said
Martin, looking round, as he threw down one of the
bales which he had just carried up from the canoe.
“Hallo! there’s a hut, I declare. Come, that’s a com-
fort anyhow.â€
As he spoke Martin pointed to one of the solitary
and rudely-constructed huts or sheds which the natives
of the banks of the Amazon sometimes erect during
the dry season and forsake when the river overflows
its banks. The hut was a very old one, and had
evidently been inundated, for the floor was a mass of
dry, solid mud, and the palm-leaf roof was much
MARTIN RATTLER. 173
damaged. However, it was better than nothing, so
they slung their hammocks under it, kindled a fire,
and prepared supper. While they were busy dis-
cussing this meal, a few dark and ominous clouds
gathered in the sky, and the old trader, glancing un-
easily about him, gave them to understand that he
feared the rainy season was going to begin.
“Well, then,†said Barney, lighting his pipe and
stretching himself at full length in his hammock,
with a leg swinging to and fro over one side and his
head leaning over the other, as was his wont when
he felt particularly comfortable in mind and body—
“well then, avic, let it begin. If we're sure to have
it anyhow, the sooner it begins the better, to my
thinkin’.â€
“JT don’t know that,†said Martin, who was seated
on a large stone beside the fire sipping a can of coffee,
which he shared equally with Marmoset. The monkey
sat on his shoulder gazing anxiously into his face,
with an expression that seemed as if the creature were
mentally exclaiming, “Now me, now you; now me,
now you,†during the whole process. “It would be
better, I think, if we were in a more sheltered posi-
tion before it begins. Ha! there it comes though, in
earnest.â€
A smart shower began to fall as he spoke, and
174 MARTIN RATTLER.
percolating through the old roof, descended rather
copiously on the mud floor. In a few minutes there
was a heaving of the ground under their feet !
“QOchone!†cried Barney, taking his pipe out of
his mouth and looking down with a disturbed expres-
sion, “ there’s an arthquake, I do belave.â€
For a few seconds there was a dead silence.
“ Nonsense,†whispered Martin uneasily.
“Ts dramin’ I must have been,†sighed Barney,
resuming his pipe.
Again the ground heaved and cracked, and Martin
and the old trader had just time to spring to their
feet when the mud floor of the hut burst upwards and
a huge, dried-up-looking alligator crawled forth, as if
from the bowels of the earth! It glanced up at
Barney, opened its tremendous jaws, and made as if
it would run at the terrified old trader; then, ob-
serving the doorway, it waddled out and, trundling
down the bank, plunged into the river and disap-
peared.
Barney could find no words to express his feelings,
but continued to gaze with an unbelieving expression
down into the hole out of which the monster had
come, and in which it had buried itself many weeks
before, when the whole country was covered with soft
mud. At that time it had probably regarded the
MARTIN RATTLER. 175
shelter of the inundated hut as of some advantage,
and had lain down to repose. The water retiring had
left it there buried, and—as we have already men-
tioned in reference to alligators—when the first shower
of the rainy season fell it was led by instinct to
burst its earthy prison and seek its native element.
Before Barney or his companions could recover from
their surprise, they had other and more urgent matters
to think about. The dark clouds burst overhead, and
the rain descended like a continued waterspout—not
in drops, but in heavy sheets and masses. The roof
of the hut gave way in several places, driving them
into a corner for shelter; the river began to rise
rapidly, soon flooding the hut; and when darkness
overspread the land, they found themselves drenched
to the skin and suspended in their hammocks over a
running stream of water !
This event brought about an entire change in the
aspect of nature, and was the cause of a sad and
momentous era in the adventures of Martin Rattler
and his companion.
CHAPTER XVII.
The Gapo—Interruptions—Grampus and Marmoset—Canoeing m tne
woods—A night on a floating island.
HERE is a peculiar and very striking feature
in the character of the great Amazon, which
affects the distinctive appearance of that river and
materially alters the manners and customs of those
who dwell beside it. This peculiarity is the periodical
overflow of its low banks; and the part thus over-
flowed is called the Gapo. It extends from a little
above the town of Santarem up to the confines of
Peru, a distance of about seventeen hundred miles,
and varies in width from one to twenty miles; so
that the country when inundated assumes in many
places the appearance of an extensive lake with forest
trees growing out of the water, and travellers may
proceed many hundreds of miles in their canoes with-
out once entering the main stream of the river. At
this time the natives become almost aquatic animals.
Several tribes of Indians inhabit the Gapo, such as
MARTIN RATTLER. 177
the Purupurus, Muras, and others. They build small
movable huts on the sandy shores during the dry
season, and on rafts in the wet. They subsist on
turtle, cow-fish, and the other fish with which the
river abounds, and live almost entirely in their
canoes; while at night they frequently sling their
hammocks between the branches of trees and sleep
suspended over the deep water.
Some of the animals found in the Gapo are peculiar
to it, being attracted by the fruit-trees which are
found growing only there. The Indians assert that
every tree that erows in the Gapo is distinct from
all those that grow in other districts; and when we
consider that these trees are submerged for six
months every year, till they are tall enough to rise
above the highest water-level, we may well believe
their constitution is somewhat different from those
that are reared on ordinary ground. The Indians
are wonderfully expert in finding their way among
the trackless mazes of the Gapo, being guided by the
broken twigs and scraped bark that indicate the
route followed by previous travellers.
Owing to this sudden commencement of the rainy
season, the old trader resolved to return to a small
village and there spend several months. Martin and
Barney were much annoyed at this; for the former
12
178 MARTIN RATTLER.
was impatient to penetrate farther into the interior ;
and the latter had firmly made up his mind to visit
the diamond mines, about which he entertained the
most extravagant notions. He did not, indeed, know
in the least how to get to these mines, nor even in
which direction they lay; but he had a strong im-
pression that as long as he continued travelling he
was approaching eradually nearer to them, and he
had no doubt whatever that he would get to them at
last. It was therefore with no small degree of im-
patience that they awaited the pleasure of their sable
master, who explained to them that when the waters
reached their height he would proceed.
Everything comes to an end, even a long story.
After many weeks had passed slowly by, their so-
journ in this village came to an end too. It was a
dull place, very dull, and they had nothing to do;
and the few poor people who lived there seemed to
have very little or nothing to do. We will therefore
pass it over, and resume our narrative at the point
when the old trader announced to Barner that the
flood was at its height and they would now continue
their journey. They embarked once more in their
old canoe with their goods and chattels, not forget-
ting Marmoset and Grampus, whose friendship dur-
ing their inactive life had become more close than
MARTIN RATTLER. 179
ever. This friendship was evidenced chiefly by the
matter-of-course way in which Grampus permitted
the monkey to mount his back and ride about the
village and through the woods, where dry places
could be found, as long as she pleased. Marmoset
was fonder of riding than walking, so that Grampus
had enough to do; but he did not put himself much
about. He trotted, walked, galloped, and lay down
when and where and as often as he chose, without
any reference to the small monkey; and Marmoset
held on through thick and thin, and nibbled nuts or
whatever else it picked up, utterly regardless of
where it was going to or the pace at which it went.
It was sharp, though, that small monkey, sharp as a
needle, and had its little black eyes glancing on all
sides; so that when Grampus dashed through under-
wood, and the branches threatened to sweep it off,
it ducked its head, or, lying flat down, shut its eyes
and held on with all its teeth and four hands like a
limpet to a rock. Marmoset was not careful as to
her attitucle on dog-back. She sat with her face to
the front or the rear, just as her fancy or convenience
dictated.
After leaving the village they travelled for many
days and nights through the Gapo. Although afloat
on the waters of the Amazon, they never entered the
180 MARTIN RATTLER.
main river after the first few days, but wound their
way, in a creeping, serpentine sort of fashion, through
small streams and lakes and swamps, from which the
light was partially excluded by the thick foliage of
the forest. It was a strange scene that illimitable
watery waste, and aroused new sensations in the
breasts of our travellers. As Barney said, it made
him “feel quite solemn-like and eerie to travel
through the woods by wather.â€
The canoe was forced under branches and among
dense bushes till they got into a part where the trees
were loftier and a deep gloom prevailed. Here the
lowest branches were on a level with the surface of
the water, and many of them were putting forth
beautiful flowers. On one occasion they came to a
grove of small palms, which were so deep in the
water that the leaves were only a few feet above the
surface. Indeed, they were so low that one of them
caught Martin’s straw-hat and swept it overboard.
“Hallo! stop!†cried Martin, interrupting the
silence so suddenly that Grampus sprang up with a
growl, under the impression that game was in view,
and Marmoset scampered off behind a packing-box
with an angry shriek.
“ What’s wrong, lad ?†inquired Barney.
“Back water, quick! my hat’s overboard, and
MARTIN RATTLER. 181
there’s an alligator going to snap it up. Look alive,
man !â€
In a few seconds the canoe was backed and the
straw-hat rescued from its perilous position.
“Tt’s an ill wind that blows nae euid, as the
Scotch say,†remarked Barney, rising in the canoe
and reaching towards something among the over-
hanging branches. “ Here’s wan o’ them trees that
old black-face calls a maraja, with some splendid
bunches o’ fruit on it. Hould yer hat, Martin;
there’s more nor enough for supper anyhow.â€
As he spoke, a rustling in the leaves told that
monkeys were watching them, and Marmoset kept
peeping up as if she half expected they might be
relations. But the moment the travellers caught
sight of them they bounded away screaming.
Having gathered as much fruit as they required,
they continued their voyage, and presently emerged
into the pleasant sunshine in a large grassy lake,
which was filled with lilies and beautiful water-
plants, little yellow bladder-worts, with several other
plants of which they knew not the names, especially
‘one with a thick swollen stalk, curious leaves, and
bright-blue flowers. This lake was soon passed, and
they again entered into the gloomy forest, and
paddled among the lofty trunks of the trees, which
182 MARTIN RATTLER.
rose like massive columns out of the deep water.
There was enough of animal life there, however, to
amuse and interest them. The constant plash of
falling fruit showed that birds were feeding over-
head. Sometimes a flock of parrots or bright-blue
chatterers swept from tree to tree, or a trogon
swooped at a falling bunch of fruit and caught it
ere it reached the water; while ungainly toucans
plumped clumsily down upon the branches, and sat,
in striking contrast, beside the lovely pompadours,
with their claret-coloured plumage and delicate white
wings.
Vieing with these birds in splendour were several
large bright-yellow flowers of the creeping-plants
which twined round the trees. Some of these plants
had white, spotted, and purple blossoms ; and there was
one splendid species, called by the natives the flor de
Santa Anna—the flower of St. Ann—which emitted
a delightful odour, and was four inches in diameter.
Having traversed this part of the wood, they once
more emerged upon the main stream of the Amazon.
It was covered with water-fowl. Large logs of trees
and numerous floating islands of grass were sailing
down; and on these sat hundreds of white gulls, de-
murely and comfortably voyaging to the ocean, for
the sea would be their final resting-place if they sat
MARTIN RATTLER. 183
on these logs and islands until they descended several
hundreds of miles of the great river.
“T wish,†said Martin, after a long silence, during
which the travellers had been gazing on the watery
waste as they paddled up stream—‘“I wish that we
could fall in with solid land, where we might have
something cooked. I’m desperately hungry now ; but
I don’t see a spot of earth large enough for a mos-
quito to rest his foot on.â€
“We'll jist have to take to farhina and wather,â€
remarked Barney, laying down his paddle and pro-
ceeding leisurely to light his pipe. “It’s a blissin’
we've got baccy, anyhow. ‘Tis mesilf that could
niver git on without it.â€
“JT wish you joy of it, Barney. It may fill your
mouth, but it can’t stop your hunger.â€
“Och, boy, it’s little ye know. Sure it stops the
cravin’s o’ hunger, and kapes yer stumick from callin’
out for iver, till ye fall in with somethin’ to ate.â€
“Tt does not seem to stop the mouth, then, Barney,
for you call out for grub oftener than I do. And then
you say that you couldn’t get on without it, so you're
a slave to it, old boy. I wouldn’t be a slave to any-
thing if I could help it.â€
“Martin, lad, ye’re gittin’ deep. Take care now,
or yell be in mettlefeesics soon—I say, ould black-
184 MARTIN RATTLER.
face,’—Barney was not on ceremony with the old
trader,—“ is there no land in thim parts at all ?â€
“No, not dis night.â€
“Och, then, we'll have to git up a tree and try to
cook somethin’ there, for I’m not goin’ to work on
flour and wather. Hallo! hould on! There’s an
island, or the portrait o’ wan. Port your helm,
Naygur! hard aport! D’ye hear?†|
The old man heard, but, as usual, paid no attention
to the Irishman’s remarks, and the canoe would have
passed straight on, had not Barney used his bow-
paddle so energetically that he managed to steer her,
as he expressed it, by the nose, and ran her against
a mass of floating logs which had caught firmly in
a thicket, and were so covered with grass and broken
twigs as to have very much the appearance of a real
island. Here they landed, so to speak, kindled a
small fire, made some coffee, roasted a few fish, baked
several cakes, and were soon as happy and comfort-
able as hungry and wearied men usually are when
they obtain rest and food.
“This is what I call jolly,†remarked Barney.
“ What's jolly ?†inquired Martin.
“Why, this, to be sure—grub to begin with, and
a smoke and a convanient snooze in prospect.â€
The hopes which Barney cherished, however, were
MARTIN RATTLER. 185
destined to be blighted, at least in part. To the
victuals he did ample justice ; the pipe was delightful
and in good working order ; but when they lay down
to repose, they were attacked by swarms of stinging
ants, which the heat of the fire had driven out of the
old logs. These and mosquitoes effectually banished
sleep from their eyelids, and caused them to reflect
very seriously, and to state to each other more than
once very impressively, that, with all their beauties
and wonders, tropical lands had their disadvantages,
and there was no place like the “ould countryâ€
after all.
CHAPTER XVIII
The sad and momentous era referred to at the close of the chapter
preceding the last.
NE sultry evening, many weeks after our trav-
C) ellers had passed the uncomfortable night on
the floating island in the Gapo, they came to a place
where the banks of the river rose boldly up in rugged
rocks and hemmed in the waters of the Amazon,
which were by this time somewhat abated. Here
they put ashore, intending to kindle their fire and
encamp for the night, having been up and hard at
work since daybreak.
The evening was calm and beautiful, and the
troublesome insects not so numerous as usual—prob-
ably owing to the nature of the ground. One or two
monkeys showed themselves for a moment, as if to
inquire who was there, and then ran away screaming ;
a porcupine also crossed their path, and several small
bright snakes, of a harmless species, glided over the
rocks, and sought refuge among the small bushes;
MARTIN RATTLER. 187
but beyond these there were few of the sights and
sounds that were wont to greet them in the forest.
“T think things look well to-night,’ remarked
Martin, as he threw down a bundle of sticks which
he had gathered for the fire; “we shall have a com-
fortable snooze for certain, if the mosquitoes don’t
wake up.†.
“T’m not so sure of that,†remarked Barney, strik-
ing a light with flint and steel, and stooping to puff
the smouldering spark into a flame. “Ive larned by
exparience that ye niver can beâ€â€”puff—“sure 0’
nothin’ in thisâ€â€”puff—“remarkable country. Jist
look at Darkey now,†continued the Irishman, sitting
down on a stone before the fire, which now began to
kindle up, and stuffing the tobacco into his pipe with
his little finger. “There he is, a livin’ Naygur,
aliftin’ of the provision-bag out o’ the canoe. Well,
if he was all of a suddent to turn into Marmoset an’
swaller himself, an’ then jump down the throat of
“Grampus, and the whole consarn, canoe and all, to
disappear, I don’t think that I would be much sur-
prised.â€
“Would you not, Barney? I suspect that I should
be a little, under the circumstances; perhaps the old
Nigger would be more so.â€
“Niver a taste,’ continued Barney. “Ye: see, if
188 MARTIN RATTLER.
that was to happen, I would then know that it was
alla drame. I’ve more than wance expected to wake
up since I comed into furrin parts; the only thing
that kapes me in doubt about it is the baccy.â€
“ How so, Barney ?â€
“Why, bekase it tastes so rael, good luck to it!
that I can’t git myself to think it’s only a drame,
Jist look, now,†he continued, in the same tone of
voice; “if it wasn’t a drame, how could I see sich
a thing as that standin’ on the rock over there?â€
Martin glanced towards the spot pointed out by
his friend, and immediately started up with surprise.
“Hallo, Barney! that’s no dream, I'll vouch for it.
He’s an Indian, and a very ugly one, too, I declare.—
I say, old fellow, do you know what sort of savage
that is?â€
“Not know,†answered the trader, glancing un-
easily at the stranger.
“He might have the dacency to put on more cloes,
anyhow,†muttered Barney, as he gazed inquiringly
at the savage.
The being who had thus appeared so suddenly
before the travellers belonged to one of the numerous
tribes of Indians inhabiting the country near the
head-waters of some of the chief tributaries of the
Amazon. He was almost entirely naked, having
MARTIN RATTLER. 189
merely a scanty covering on his loins, and carried a
small quiver full of arrows at his back, and what
appeared to be a long spear in his hand. His figure
was strongly but not well formed, and his face,
which was of a dark copper hue, was disfigured in
a most remarkable manner. A mass of coarse black
hair formed the only covering to his head. His
cheeks were painted with curious marks of jet black.
But the most remarkable points about him were the
huge pieces of wood which formed ornaments in his
ears and under lip. They were round and flat, like
the wooden wheel of a toy-cart, about half an inch
thick, and larger than an old-fashioned watch. These
were fitted into enormous slits made in the ears and
under lip, and the latter projected more than two
inches from his mouth! Indeed, the cut that had
been made to receive this ornament was so large that
the lip had been almost cut off altogether, and merely
hung by each corner of his mouth! The aspect of
the man was very hideous, and it was by no means
improved when, having recovered from his surprise
at unexpectedly encountering strangers, he opened his
mouth to the full extent and uttered a savage yell.
The cry was answered immediately. In a few
minutes a troop of upwards of thirty savages sprang
from the woods, and ascending the rock on which
190 MARTIN RATTLER.
their comrade stood, gazed down on the travellers in
surprise, and, by their movements, seemed to be
making hasty preparations for an attack,
By this time Barney had recovered his self-posses-
sion, and became thoroughly convinced of the reality
of the apparition before him. Drawing his pistol
hastily from his belt, he caught up a handful of
gravel, wherewith he loaded it to the muzzle, ramming
down the charge with a bit of mandioca cake in lieu
of a wad; then drawing his cutlass he handed it to
Martin, exclaiming, “Come, lad; we’re in for it now.
Take you the cutlass, and I'll try their skulls with
the butt o’ my pistol; it has done good work before
now in that way. If there’s no more o’ the black-
guards in the background, we'll bate them aisy.â€
Martin instinctively grasped the cutlass, and there
is no doubt that, under the impulse of that remarkable
quality, British valour, which utterly despises odds,
they would have hurled themselves recklessly upon
the savages, when the horrified old trader threw him-
self on Barney’s neck and implored him not to fight;
for if he did they would all be killed, and if he only
kept quiet the savages would perhaps do them no
harm. At the same moment about fifty additional
Indians arrived upon the scene of action. This, and
the old man’s earnest entreaties, induced them to
MARTIN RATTLER. 191
hesitate for an instant, and before they could deter-
mine what to do, they were surprised by some of the
savages, who rushed upon them from behind and took
them prisoners. Barney struggled long and fiercely,
but he was at length overpowered by numbers. The
pistol, which missed fire, was wrenched from his grasp,
and his hands were speedily bound behind his back.
Martin was likewise disarmed and secured; not, how-
ever, before he made a desperate slash at one of the
savages, which narrowly missed his skull, and cut
away his lip ornament.
As for the old trader, he made no resistance at all,
but submitted quietly to his fate. The savages did
not seem to think it worth their while to bind him.
Grampus bounced and barked round the party say-
agely, but did not attack; and Marmoset slept in the
canoe in blissful ignorance of the whole transaction.
The hands of the two prisoners being firmly bound,
they were allowed to do as they pleased; so they sat
down on a rock in gloomy silence, and watched the
naked savages as they rifled the canoe and danced
joyfully round the treasures which their active knives
and fingers soon exposed to view. The old trader
took things philosophically. Knowing that it was
absolutely impossible to escape, he sat quietly down
on a stone, rested his chin on his hands, heaved one
192 MARTIN RATTLER.
or two deep sighs, and thereafter seemed to be nothing
more than an ebony statue.
The ransacking of the canoe and appropriating of
its contents occupied the savages but a short time,
after which they packed everything up in small
bundles, which they strapped upon their backs, Then,
making signs to their prisoners to rise, they all marched
away into the forest. Just as they were departing,
Marmoset, observing that she was about to be left
behind, uttered a frantic cry, which brought Grampus
gambolling to her side. With an active bound the
monkey mounted its charger, and away they went
into the forest in the track of the band of savages.
During the first part of their march Martin and
Barney were permitted to walk beside each other, and
they conversed in low, anxious tones.
“Surely,†said Barney, as they marched along sur-
rounded by Indians, “thim long poles the savages
have got are not spears; I don’t see no point to
them.â€
ce
“And what’s more remarkable,†added Martin, “is
that they all carry quivers full of arrows, but none of
them have bows.â€
“There’s a raison for iverything,’ said Barney,
pointing to one of the Indians in advance; “that
fellow explains the mystery.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 193
As he spoke, the savage referred to lowered the
pole, which seemed to be about thirteen feet long,
and pushing an arrow into a hole in the end of it,
applied it to his mouth. In another moment the
arrow flew through the air and grazed a bird that
was sitting on a branch hard by.
“’Tis a blow-pipe, and no mistake!†cried Barney.
“And a poisoned arrow, I’m quite sure,†added
Martin ; “for it only ruffled the bird’s feathers, and
see, it has fallen to the ground.â€
“Och, then, but we’d have stood a bad chance in a
fight, if thim’s the wipons they use. Och, the dirty
spalpeens! Martin, dear, we’re done for. There’s no
chance for us at all.â€
This impression seemed to take such deep hold of
Barney’s mind, that his usually reckless and half jest-
ing disposition was completely subdued, and he walked
along in gloomy silence, while a feeling of deep de-
jection filled the heart of his young companion.
The blow-pipe which these Indians use is an in-
geniously contrived weapon. It is made from a species
of palm-tree. When an Indian wants one, he goes
into the woods and selects a tree with a long slender
stem of Jess than an inch in diameter. He extracts
the pith out of this; and then cuts another stem, so
much larger than the first that he can push the small
13
194, MARTIN RATTLER.
tube into the bore of the large one—thus the slight
bend in one is counteracted by the other, and a per-
fectly straight pipe is formed. The mouthpiece is
afterwards neatly finished off. The arrows used are
very short, having a little ball of cotton at the end to
fill the tube of the blow-pipe. The points are dipped
in a peculiar poison, which has the effect of producing
death when introduced into the blood by a mere
seratch of the skin. The Indians can send these
arrows an immense distance, and with unerring aim,
as Martin and Barney had many an opportunity of
witnessing during their long and weary journey on
foot to the forest-home of the savages.
CHAPTER XIX.
Worse and worsc—Everything seems to go wrong together.
LTHOUGH the Indians did not maltreat the
A unfortunate strangers who had thus fallen
imto their hands, they made them proceed by forced
marches through the wilderness; and as neither Bar-
ney nor Martin had been of late much used to long
walks, they felt the journey very severely. The old
trader had been accustomed to everything wretched
and unfortunate and uncomfortable from his child-
hood, so he plodded onward in silent indifference.
The country through which they passed became
every day more and more rugged, until at length it
assumed the character of a wild mountainous district.
Sometimes they wound their way in a zigzag manner
up the mountain sides, by paths so narrow that they
could scareely find a foothold. At other times they
descended into narrow valleys where they saw great
numbers of wild animals of various kinds, some of
which the Indians killed for food. After they reached
196 MARTIN RATTLER.
the mountain district they loosed the hands of their
prisoners, in order to enable them to climb more easily.
Indeed in many places they had to scramble so care-
fully that it would have been impossible for any one
to climb with his hands tied behind his back. But
the Indians knew full well that they ran no risk of
losing their prisoners; for if they had attempted to
escape, dozens of their number were on the watch,
before, behind, and on either side, ready to dart away
in pursuit. Moreover, Barney had a feeling of horror
at the bare idea of the poisoned arrows, that effect-
ually prevented him from making the smallest attempt
at escape. With a cutlass or a heavy stick he would
have attacked the whole tribe single-handed, and have
fought till his brains were knocked out; but when
he thought of the small arrows that would pour upon
him in hundreds if he made a dash for the woods,
and the certain death that would follow the slightest
scratch, he discarded all idea of rebellion.
One of the animals killed by the Indians at this
time was a black jaguar—a magnificent animal, and
very fierce. He was discovered crouching in a thicket
backed by a precipice, from which he could only escape
by charging through the ranks of his enemies. He
did it nobly. With a roar that rebounded from the
face of the high cliff and echoed through the valley
MARTIN RATTLER. 197
like a peal of thunder, he sprang out and rushed at
the savages in front, who scattered like chaff right
and left. But at the same instant fifty blow-pipes
sent their poisoned shafts into his body, and, after a
few convulsive bounds, the splendid monarch of the
American forests fell dead on the ground. The black
Jaguar is a somewhat rare animal, and is very seldom
seen. ‘l’his one was therefore hailed as a great prize,
and the skin and claws were carefully preserved.
On the afternoon of the same day the party came
to a broad stream, over which they, or some other of
the numerous tribes in the country, had constructed a
very simple and curious bridge. It was a single rope
attached to an immense mass of rock on one side and
to the stem of a large tree on the other. On this
tight-rope was fastened a simple loop of cord, so con-
structed that it could encircle the waist of a man and
at the same time traverse from one end of the tight-
rope to the other. Barney put on a comical frown
when he came to this and saw the leader of the party
rest his weight in the loop, and, clinging with hands
and legs to the long rope, work himself slowly across.
“Arrah! it’s well for us, Martin, that we're used
to goin’ aloft,†said he, “or that same bridge would
try our narves a little.â€
“So it would, Barney. I’ve seldom seen a more
198 MARTIN RATTLER.
uncomfortable-looking contrivance. If we lost our
hold we should first be dashed to pieces on the rocks,
and then be drowned in the river.â€
Difficult though the passage seemed, however, it
was soon accomplished by the active savages in safety.
The only one of the party likely to be left behind
was Grampus; whom his master, after much entreaty
in dumb-show, was permitted to carry over by tying
him firmly to his shoulders. Marmoset crossed over
walking, like a tight-rope dancer, being quite aw fait
at such work. Soon after they came to another
curious bridge over a ravine. It had been constructed
by simply felling two tall trees on the edge of it in
such a manner that they fell across. They were
bound together with the supple vines that grew there
in profusion. Nature had soon covered the whole
over with climbing-plants and luxuriant verdure ;
and the bridge had become a broad and _ solid
structure over which the whole party marched with
perfect ease. Several such bridges were crossed, and
also a few of the rope kind, during the journey.
After many weeks’ constant travelling, the Indians
came to a beautiful valley one evening just about
sunset, and began to make the usual preparations for
encamping. The spot they selected was a singular
one. It was at the foot of a rocky gorge, up which
MARTIN RATTLER. 199
might be seen trees and bushes mingled with jagged
rocks and dark caverns, with a lofty sierra or moun-
tain range in the background. In front was the
beautiful valley which they had just crossed. Ona
huge rock there grew a tree of considerable size, the
roots of which projected beyond the rock several
yards, and then, bending downwards, struck into the
ground. Creeping-plants had twined thickly among
the roots, and thus formed a sort of lattice-work which
enclosed a large space of ground. In this natural
arbour the chiefs of the Indians took up their
quarters and kindled their fire in the centre of it,
while the main body of the party pitched their camp
outside. The three prisoners were allotted a corner in
the arbour; and, after having supped, they spread
their ponchos on a pile of ferns, and found themselves
very snug indeed.
“Martin,†said Barney gravely, as he smoked his
pipe and patted the head of his dog, “dye know I’m
beginning to feel tired o’ the company o’ thim naked
rascals, and I’ve been revolvin’ in my mind what we
should do to escape. Moreover, I’ve comed to a con-
clusion.â€
“ And what’s that?†inquired Martin.
“That it’s unposs’ble to escape at all, and I dont
know what to do.â€
200 MARTIN RATTLER.
“ That's not a satisfactory conclusion, Barney. I,
too, have been cogitating a good deal about these
Indians, and it is my opinion that they have been on
a war expedition, for I’ve noticed that several of
them have been wounded; and, besides, I cannot
fancy what else could take them so far from home.â€
“True, Martin, true. I wonder what they intind
to do with us. They don’t mean to kill us, anyhow,
for if they did they would niver take the trouble to
bring us here. Ochone! me heart’s beginnin’ to go
down altogether, for we are miles and miles away
from anywhere now, and I don’t know the direction
o’ no place whatsumdiver.â€
“ Never mind, Barney, cheer up,†said Martin with
a smile; “if they don’t kill us, that’s all we need care
about. I’m sure we shall manage to escape somehow
or other in the long-run.â€
While they thus conversed the old trader spread
his poncho over himself and was soon sound asleep ;
while the Indians, after finishing supper, held an
animated conversation. At times they seemed to
be disputing, and spoke angrily and with violent
gesticulations, glancing now and then at the corner
where their prisoners lay.
“Tt’s my belafe,†whispered Barney, “ that they're
spakin’ about us. Tm afeard they don’t mean us any
MARTIN RATTLER. 201
good. Och, but if I wance had my pistol and the
ould cutlass. Well, well, it’s of no manner o’ use
frettin’. Good-night, Martin, good-night !â€
The Irishman knocked the ashes out of his pipe,
turned his face to the wall, and, heaving a deep sigh,
speedily forgot his cares in sleep. The Indians also
lay down, the camp-fires died slowly out, and the deep
breathing of the savages alone betokened the presence
of man in that lone wilderness.
Barney’s forebodings proved to be only too well
founded, for next morning, instead of pursuing their
way together, as usual, the savages divided their
forces into two separate bands, placing the Irishman
and the old trader in the midst of one, and Martin
Rattler with the other.
“Surely they're niver goin’ to part us, Martin,â€
said Barney with a careworn expression on his
honest countenance that indicated the anxious sus-
picions in his heart.
“JT fear it much,†replied Martin with a startled
look, as he watched the proceedings of the Indians.
“We must fight now, Barney, if we should die for it.
We must not be separated.â€
Martin spoke with intense fervour, and gazed
anxiously in the face of his friend. A dark frown
had gathered there. The sudden prospect of being
202 MARTIN RATTLER.
forcibly torn from his young companion, whom he
regarded with almost a mother’s tenderness, stirred
his enthusiastic and fiery temperament to its centre,
and he gazed wildly about, as if for some weapon.
But the savages anticipated his intention. Ere he
could grasp any offensive weapon two of their number
leaped upon him, and at the same moment Martin’s
arms were pinioned in a powerful grasp.
“Och, ye murderin’ blackguards!†cried Barney,
hitting out right and left and knocking down a
savage at each blow, “now or niver! come on, ye
kangaroos!â€
A general rush was made upon the Irishman, who
was fairly overturned by the mass of men. Martin
struggled fiercely to free himself, and would have
succeeded had not two powerful Indians hastened to
the help of the one who had first seized him. Despite
his frantie efforts, he was dragged forcibly up the
mountain gorge, the echoes of which rang with his
cries as he shouted despairingly the name of his
friend. Barney fought like a tiger, but he could
make no impression on such numbers. Although at
least a dozen Indians lay around him bleeding and
stunned by the savage blows of his fists—a species
of warfare which was entirely new to them—fresh
savages crowded round. But they did not wish to
MARTIN RATTLER. 208
kill him, and numerous though they were they found
it no easy matter to secure so powerful a man; and
when Martin turned a last despairing glance towards
the camp, ere a turn in the path shut it out from
view, the hanimer-like fists of his comrade were still
smashing down the naked creatures who danced like
monkeys round him, and the warlike shouts of his
stentorian voice reverberated among the cliffs and
caverns of the mountain pass long after he was hid
from view.
Thus Martin and Barney were separated in the
wild regions near the Sierra dos Parecis of Brazil.
CHAPTER XX.
Martin reflects much, and forms a Jirm resolve—The Indian village.
HEN the mind has been overwhelmed by
some sudden and terrible calamity, it is
long ere it again recovers its wonted elasticity. An
aching void seems to exist in the heart, and a dead
weight appears to press upon the brain, so that
ordinary objects make but little impression, and the
soul seems to turn inwards and brood drearily upon
itself. The spirit of fun and frolic, that had filled
Martin Rattler’s heart ever since he landed in Brazil,
was now so thoroughly and rudely crushed that he
felt as if it were utterly impossible that he should
ever smile again.
He had no conception of the strength of his affec-
tion for the rough, hearty sailor who had until now
been the faithful and good-humoured companion of
his wanderings. As Barney had himself said on a
former occasion, his life up till this period had been
a pleasant and exciting dream. But he was now
MARTIN RATTLER. 205
rudely awakened to the terrible reality of his forlorn
position ; and the more he thought of it, the more
hopeless and terrible it appeared to be.
He knew not in what part of Brazil he was; he
was being hurried apparently deeper into these vast
solitudes by savages who were certainly not friendly,
and of whose language he knew not a word; and,
worst of all, he was separated, perhaps for ever, from
the friend on whom, all unconsciously to himself, he
had so long leaned for support in all their difficulties
and dangers. Even though he and Barney should
succeed in escaping from the Indians, he felt—and
his heart was overwhelmed at the thought—that
in such a vast country there was not the shadow
of a chance that they should find each other. Under
the deep depression produced by these thoughts
Martin wandered on wearily, as if in a dream, taking
no interest in anything that occurred by the way.
At length, after several days’ fatiguing journey over
mountains and plains, they arrived at the Indian
village.
Here the warriors were received with the utmost
joy by the wives and children whom they had left
behind, and for a long time Martin was left almost
entirely to do as he pleased. A few days before, his
bonds had been removed, and once or twice he thought
206 MARTIN RATTLER.
of attempting to escape; but whenever he wandered
a little further than usual into the woods, he found
that he was watched and followed by a tall and
powerful savage, whose duty it evidently was to see
that the prisoner did not escape. The fearful idea
now entered Martin’s mind that he was reserved for
torture, and perhaps a lingering death; for he had
read that many savage nations treated their prisoners
in this cruel manner, for the gratification of the
women who had lost relations in the war. But as no
violence was offered to him in the meantime, and he
had as much farina and fruit to eat as he could use,
his mind gradually became relieved, and he en-
deavoured as much as possible to dismiss the terrible
thought altogether.
The Indian village occupied a lovely situation at
the base of a gentle hill or rising ground, the summit
of which was clothed with luxuriant trees and shrubs.
The huts were of various shapes and sizes, and very
simple in construction. They were built upon the
bare ground. Some were supported by four corner
posts, twelve or fifteen feet high, and from thirty to
forty feet long, the walls being made of thin laths
connected with wicker-work and plastered with clay.
The doors were made of palm-leaves, and the roofs
were covered with the same material, or with maize
MARTIN RATTLER. 207
straw. Other huts were made almost entirely of
palm-leaves and were tent-shaped in form ; and, while
a few were enclosed by walls, the most of the square
ones had one or more sides entirely open. In the
large huts several families dwelt together, and each
family had a hearth and a portion of the floor allotted
to it. The smoke from their fires was allowed to find
its way out by the doors and chinks in the roofs, as
no chimneys were constructed for its egress,
The furniture of each hut was very simple It
consisted of a few earthen pots; baskets made of
palm-leaves, which were filled with Spanish potatoes,
maize, mandioca roots, and various kinds of wild
fruits ; one or two drinking vessels; the hollow trunk
of a tree, used for pounding maize in; and several
dishes which contained the colours used by the
Indians in painting their naked bodies—a custom
which was very prevalent amongst them. Besides
these things, there were bows, arrows, spears, and
blow-pipes in abundance; and hammocks hung from
various posts, elevated about a foot from the ground.
These hammocks were made of cotton cords, and
served the purpose of tables, chairs, and beds.
The ground in the immediate neighbourhood of the
village was laid out in patches, in which were culti-
vated mandioca roots, maize, and other plants useful
208 MARTIN RATTLER.
for domestic purposes. In front of the village there
was an extensive valley, through which a small river
gurgled with a pleasant sound. It was hemmed in
on all sides by wooded mountains, and was so beauti-
fully diversified by scattered clusters of palms, and
irregular patches of undulating grassy plains all
covered with a rich profusion of tropical flowers and
climbing-plants, that it seemed to Martin more like
a magnificent garden than the uncultivated forest—
only far more rich and lovely and picturesque than
any artificial garden could possibly be. When the sun
shone in full splendour on this valley—as it almost
always did—it seemed as if the whole landscape were
on the point of bursting into flames of red and blue,
and green and gold; and when Martin sat under the
shade of a tamarind tree and gazed long upon the
enchanting scene, his memory often reverted to the
Eden of which he used to read in the Bible at
home, and he used to wonder if it were possible
that the sun and flowers and trees could be more
lovely in the time when Adam walked with God in
Paradise.
Martin was young then, and he did not consider,
although he afterwards came to know, that it was not
the beauty of natural chjects, but the presence and
favour of God and the absence of sin, that rendered
MARTIN RATTLER. 209
the Garden of Eden a paradise. But these thoughts
always carried him back to dear old Aunt Dorothy
and the sweet village of Ashford; and the Brazilian
paradise was not unfrequently obliterated in tears
while he gazed, and turned into a vale of weeping.
Ay, he would have given that magnificent valley—
had it been his own—ten times over, in exchange for
one more glance at the loved faces and the green fields
of home.
Soon after his arrival at the Indian village Martin
was given to understand, by signs, that he was to
reside with a particular family, and work every day
in the maize and mandioca fields, besides doing a
great deal of the drudgery of the hut; so that he
now knew he was regarded as a slave by the tribe
into whose hands he had fallen. It is impossible to
express the bitterness of his feelings at this discovery,
and for many weeks he went about his work scarcely
knowing what he did, and caring little, when the
hot sun beat on him so fiercely that he could hardly
stand, whether he lived or died. At length, however,
he made up his mind firmly to attempt his escape.
He was sitting beneath the shade of his favourite
resort, the tamarind tree, when he made this resolve.
Longing thoughts of home had been strong upon him
all that day, and desire for the companionship of
14
210 MARTIN RATTLER,
Barney had filled his heart to bursting ; so that the
sweet evening sunshine and the beautiful vale over
which his eyes wandered, instead of affording him
pleasure, seemed but to mock his misery. It was a
lesson that all must learn sooner or later, and one we
would do well to think upon before we learn it, that
sunshine in the soul is not dependent on the sunshine
of this world; and when once the clouds descend, the
brightest beams of all that earth contains cannot
pierce them. God alone can touch these dark clouds
with the finger of love and mercy, and say again, as
he said of old, “ Let there be light.â€
A firm purpose, formed with heart and will, is
cheering and invigorating to a depressed mind. No
sooner did the firm determination to escape or die
enter into Martin’s heart, than he sprang from his
seat, and, falling on his knees, prayed to God, in the
name of our Redeemer, for help and guidance. He
had not the least idea of how he was to effect his
escape, or of what he intended to do. All he knew
was that he had made up his mind to do so, if God
would help him. And under the strength of that
resolve he soon recovered much of his former cheer-
fulness of disposition, and did his work among the
savages with a degree of energy that filled them with
surprise and respect. From that day forth he never
MARTIN RATTLER. 211
ceased to revolve in his mind every imaginable and
unimaginable plan of escape, and to watch every
event or circumstance, no matter how trifling, that
seemed likely to aid him in his purpose.
Seeing that he was a very strong and active fellow,
and that he had become remarkably expert in the use
of the bow and the blow-pipe, the Indians now per-
mitted Martin to accompany them frequently on their
short hunting expeditions, so that he had many op-
portunities of seeing more of the wonderful animals
and plants of the Brazilian forests, in the studying
of which he experienced great delight. Moreover, in
the course of a few months he began to acquire a
smattering of the Indian language, and was not com-
pelled to live in constant silence, as had been the case
at first. But he carefully avoided the formation of
any friendships with the youths of the tribe, although
many of them seemed to desire it, considering that his
doing so might in some way or other interfere with
the execution of his great purpose. He was civil and
kind to them all, however, though reserved ; and, as
time wore away, he enjoyed much more liberty than
was the case at first. Still, however, he was watched
by the tall savage, who was a surly, silent fellow, and
would not be drawn into conversation. Indeed he
did not walk with Martin, but followed him wherever
212 MARTIN RATTLER.
he went, during his hours of leisure, at a distance of
a few hundred yards, moving when his prisoner
moved, and stopping when he halted, so that Martin
at last began to regard him more as a shadow than a
man.
CHAPTER XXTI.
Savage feasts and ornaments—Martin grows desperate, and makes
a bold attempt to escape.
UNTING and feasting were the chief occupa-
tions of the men of the tribe with whom
Martin sojourned. One day Martin was told that a
great feast was to take place, and he was permitted
to attend. Accordingly, a little before the appointed
time he hastened to the large hut in and around
which the festivities were to take place, in order to
witness the preparations.
The first thing that struck him was that there
seemed to be no preparations making for eating; and
on inquiry he was told that they did not meet to eat,
they met to drink and dance—those who were hungry
might eat at home. The preparations for drinking
were mace on an extensive scale by the women, a
number of whom stood round a large caldron,
preparing its contents for use. These women wore
very little clothing, and their bodies, besides being
214 MARTIN RATTLER.
painted in a fantastic style, were also decorated with
flowers and. feathers. Martin could not help feeling
that, however absurd the idea of painting the body
was, it had at least the good effect of doing away to
some extent with the idea of nakedness; for the
curious patterns and devices gave to the Indians the
appearance of being clothed in tights—and, at any
rate, he argued mentally, paint was better than
nothing. Some of the flowers were artificially con-
structed out of beetles’ wings, shells, fish-scales, and
feathers, and were exquisitely beautiful as well as
gorgeous.
One of the younger women struck Martin as being
ultra-fashionable in her paint. Her black shining
hair hung like a cloak over her reddish-brown
shoulders, and various strange drawings and figures
ornamented her face and breast. On each cheek she
had a circle, and over that two strokes. Under the
nose were four red spots. From the corners of her
mouth to the middle of each cheek were two parallel
lines, and below these several upright stripes. Gn
various parts of her back and shoulders were curiously
entwined circles, and the form of a snake was depicted
in vermilion down each arm. Unlike the others, she
wore no ornament except a simple necklace of monkeys’
teeth. This beauty was particularly active in manu-
MARTIN RATTLER. 215
facturing the intoxicating drink, which was prepared
thus :—A quantity of maize was pounded in the hollow
trunk of a tree, and put into an earthen pot, where
it was boiled in a large quantity of water. Then the
women took the coarsely-ground and boiled flour out
of the water, chewed it im their mouths for a little,
and put it into the pot again! By this means the
decoction began to ferment and became intoxicating.
It was a very disgusting method; yet it is practised
by many Indian tribes in America, and, strange to
say, also by some of the South Sea Islanders, who, of
course, could not have learned it from these Indians.
When this beverage was ready, the chief, a tall,
broad-shouldered man, whose painted costume and
ornaments were most elaborate, stepped up to the pot
and began a strange series of incantations, which he
accompanied by rattling a small wooden instrument
in his hand; staring all the time at the earthen pot,
as if he half expected it to run away, and dancing
slowly round it, as if to prevent such a catastrophe
from taking place. The oftener the song was repeated
the more solemn and earnest became the expression of
his face and the tones of his voice. The rest of the
Indians, who were assembled to the number of several
hundreds, stood motionless round the pot, staring at
him intently without speaking, and only now and
216 MARTIN RATTLER.
then, when the voice and actions of the chief became
much excited, they gave vent to a sympathetic howl.
After this had gone on for some time, the chief
seized a drinking-cup, or cuja, which he gravely
dipped into the pot and took a sip. Then the shaking
of the rattle and the monotonous song began again.
The chief next took a good pull at the cup and
emptied it ; after which he presented it to his com-
panions, who helped themselves at pleasure; and the
dance and monotonous music became more furious and
noisy the longer the cup went round.
When the cup had circulated pretty freely among
them, their dances and music became more lively,
but they were by no means attractive. After he had
watched them a short time, Martin left the festive
scene with a feeling of pity for the poor savages, and
as he thought upon their low and debased condition
he recalled to mind the remark of his old friend the
hermit—* They want the Bible in Brazil.â€
During his frequent rambles in the neighbourhood
of the Indian village, Martin discovered many beautiful
and retired spots, to which he was in the habit of
going in the evenings after his daily labours were
accomplished—accompanied, as usual, at a respectful
distance, by his vigilant friend the tall savage. One
of his favourite resting-places was at the foot of a
MARTIN RATTLER. 217
banana tree which grew on the brow of a stupendous
cliff about a mile distant from the hut in which he
dwelt. From this spot he had a commanding view of
the noble valley and the distant mountains. These
mountains now seemed to the poor boy to be the
ponderous gates of his beautiful prison, for he had
been told by one of his Indian friends that on the
other side of them were great campos and forests,
beyond which dwelt many Portuguese, while still
farther on was a great lake without shores, which
was the end of the world. This, Martin was con-
vinced, must be the Atlantic Ocean, for, upon inquiry,
he found that many months of travel must be under-
gone ere it could be reached. Moreover, he knew
that it could not be the Pacitic, because the sun rose
in that direction.
Sauntering away to his favourite cliff, one fine
evening towards sunset, he seated himself beneath the
banana tree and gazed longingly at the distant moun-
tains, whose sharp summits glittered in the ruddy
glow. He had long racked his brain in order to
devise some method of escape, but hitherto without
success. Wherever he went the “shadow†followed
him, armed with the deadly blow-pipe; and he knew
that even if he did succeed in eluding his vigilance
and escaping into the woods, hundreds of savages
218 MARTIN RATTLER.
would turn out and track him, with unerring certainty,
to any hiding-place. Still the strength of his stern
determination sustained him, and at each failure in
his efforts to devise some means of effecting his
purpose he threw off regret with a deep sigh, and
returned to his labour with a firmer step, assured
that he should eventually succeed.
As he sat there on the edge of the precipice he
said, half aloud, “What prevents me from darting
suddenly on that fellow and knocking him down?â€
This was a question that might have been easily
answered. No doubt he was physically capable of
coping with the man, for he had now been upwards
of a year in the wilderness, and was in his sixteenth
year, besides being unusually tall and robust for his
age. Indeed he looked more like a full-grown man
than a stripling, for hard, incessant toil had de-
veloped his muscles and enlarged his frame, and his
stirring life, combined latterly with anxiety, had
stamped a few of the lines of manhood on his sunburnt
countenance. But, although he could have easily
overcome the Indian, he knew that he would be
instantly missed, and from what he had seen of the
powers of the savages in tracking wild animals to
their dens in the mountains, he felt that he could not
possibly elude them except by stratagem.
MARTIN RATTLER. 219
Perplexed and wearied with unavailing thought
and anxiety, Martin pressed his hands to his forehead
and gazed down the perpendicular cliff, which was
_ elevated fully a hundred feet above the plain below.
Suddenly he started, and clasped his hands upon his
eyes, as if to shut out some terrible object from his
sight. Then, creeping cautiously towards the edge of
the cliff, he gazed down, while an expression of stern
resolution settled upon his pale face.
And well might Martin’s cheek blanch, for he had
hit upon a plan of escape which, to be successful,
required that he should twice turn a bold, unflinching
face on death. The precipice, as before mentioned,
was fully a hundred feet high, and quite perpendicular.
At the foot of it there flowed a deep and pretty wide
stream, which, just under the spot where Martin stood,
collected in a deep black pool, where it rested for a
moment ere it rushed on its rapid course down the
valley. Over the cliff and into that pool Martin
made up his mind to plunge, and so give the impression
that he had fallen over and been drowned. The risk
he ran in taking such a tremendous leap was very
great indeed, but that was only half the danger he
must encounter.
The river was one of a remarkable kind, of which
there are one or two instances in South America.
220 MARTIN RATTLER.
It flowed down the valley between high rocks, and,
a few hundred yards below the pool, it ran straight
against the face of a precipice and there terminated
to all appearance ; but a gurgling vortex in the deep
_water at the base of the cliff, and the disappearance
of everything that entered it, showed that the stream
found a subterranean passage. There was no sign of
its reappearance, however, in all the country round.
In short, the river was lost in the bowels of the
earth.
From the pool to the cliff where the river was
engulfed the water ran like a mill-race, and there
was no spot on either bank where any one could land,
or even grasp with his hand, except one. It was a
narrow, sharp rock that jutted out about two feet
from the bank, quite close to the vortex of the whirl-
pool. This rock was Martin’s only hope. To miss
it would be certain destruction. But if he should
gain a footing on it he knew that he could climb by
a narrow fissure into a wild, cavernous spot, which it
was exceedingly difficult to reach from any other
point. A bend in the river concealed this rock and
the vortex from the place whereon he stood, so that
he hoped to be able to reach the point of escape before
the savage could descend the slope and gain the
summit of the cliff from whence it could be seen.
MARTIN RATTLER. 221
Of all this Martin was well aware, for he had been
often at the place before, and knew every inch of the
ground. His chief difficulty would be to leap over
_ the precipice in such a manner as to cause the Indian
to believe he had fallen over accidentally. If he
could accomplish this, then he felt assured the savages
would suppose he had been drowned, and so make no
search for him atall. Fortunately the ground favoured
this. About five feet below the edge of the precipice
there was a projecting ledge of rock nearly four feet
broad and covered with shrubs. Upon this it was
necessary to allow himself to fall. The expedient
was a desperate one, and he grew sick at heart as he
glanced down the awful cliff, which seemed to him
three times higher than it really was, as all heights
do when seen from above.
Glancing round, he observed his savage guardian
gazing contemplatively at the distant prospect.
Martin’s heart beat audibly as he rose and walked
with an affectation of carelessness to the edge of the
cliff. As he gazed down, a feeling of horror seized
him ; he gasped for breath, and almost fainted. Then
the idea of perpetual slavery flashed across his mind,
and the thought of freedom and home nerved him.
He clinched his hands, staggered convulsively forward,
and fell, with a loud and genuine shriek of terror,
222 MARTIN RATTLER.
upon the shrubs that covered the rocky ledge.
Instantly he arose, ground his teeth together, raised
his eyes for one moment to heaven, and sprang into
the air. For one instant he swept through empty
space, the next he was deep down in the waters of
the dark pool; and when the horrified Indian reached
the edge of the precipice, he beheld his prisoner
struggling on the surface for a moment, ere he was
swept by the rapid stream round the point and out
of view.
Bounding down the slope, the savage sped like a
hunted antelope across the intervening space between
the two cliffs, and quickly gained the brow of the
lower precipice, which he reached just in time to see
Martin Rattler’s straw hat dance for a moment on the
troubled waters of the vortex and disappear in the
awful abyss. But Martin saw it too, from the cleft
in the frowning rock.
On reaching the surface after his leap he dashed
the water from his eyes and looked with intense
earnestness in the direction of the projecting rock
towards which he was hurried. Down he came upon
it with such speed that he felt no power of man
could resist. But there was a small eddy just below
it, into which he was whirled as he stretched forth
his hands and clutched the rock with the energy of
MARTIN RATTLER. 223
despair. He was instantly torn away. But another
small point projected two feet below it. This he
seized. The water swung his feet to and fro as it
gushed into the vortex, but the eddy saved him. In
a moment his breast was on the rock, then his foot,
and he sprang into the sheltering cleft just a moment
before the Indian came in view of the scene of his
supposed death.
Martin flung himself with his face to the ground,
and thought rather than uttered a heartfelt thanks-
giving for his deliverance. The savage carried the
news of his death to his friends in the Indian village,
and recounted with deep solemnity the particulars of
his awful fate to crowds of wondering—in many cases
sorrowing—listeners ; and for many a day after that
the poor savages were wont to visit the terrible cliff,
and gaze with awe on the mysterious vortex that had
swallowed up, as they believed, the fair-haired boy.
CHAPTER XXII.
The escape—Alone in the wilderness—Fight between «a jaguar and aa
alligatovr—Martin encowaters strange and terrible creatures.
REEDOM can be fully appreciated only by those
fk who have been for a long period deprived of
liberty. It is impossible to comprehend the feelings
of joy that welled up in Martin’s -bosom as he clam-
bered up the rugged cliffs among which he had found
shelter, and looked round upon the beautiful valley,
now lying in the shadow of the mountain range
behind which the sun had just set. He sat down on
a rock, regardless of the wet condition of his clothes,
and pondered long and earnestly over his position,
which was still one of some danger; but a sensation
of light-hearted recklessness made the prospect before
him seem very bright. He soon made up his mind
what to do. The weather was extremely warm, so
that after wringing the water out of his linen clothes
he experienced little discomfort; but he felt. that
there would not only be discomfort but no little
MARTIN RATTLER. 225
danger in travelling in such a country without arms,
covering, or provisions. He therefore determined on
the bold expedient of revisiting the Indian village
during the darkness of the night in order to procure
what he required. He ran great risk of being re-
taken ; but his necessity was urgent, and he was aware
that several families were absent on a hunting ex-
pedition at that time whose huts were pretty certain
to be unoccupied.
Accordingly, when two or three hours of the night
had passed, he clambered with much difficulty down
the precipitous rocks and reached the level plain, over
which he quickly ran, and soon reached the outskirts
of the village. The Indians were all asleep, and no
sound disturbed the solemn stillness of the night.
Going stealthily towards a hut, he peeped in at the
open window, but could see and hear nothing. Just
as he was about to enter, however, a long-drawn
breath proved that it was occupied. He shrank
hastily back into the deep shade of the bushes. In
a few minutes he recovered from the agitation into
which he had been thrown, and advanced cautiously
towards another hut. This one seemed to be un-
tenanted, so he opened the palm-leaf door gently and
entered. No time was to be lost now. He found an
empty sack or bag, into which he hastily threw as
15
226 MARTIN RATTLER.
much farina as he could carry without inconvenience.
Besides this, he appropriated a long knife, a small
hatchet, a flint and steel to enable him to make a
fire, and a stout bow, with a quiver full of arrows.
It was so dark that it was with difficulty he found
these things. But as he was on the point of leaving
he observed a white object in a corner. This turned
out to be a light hammock, which he seized eagerly,
and, rolling it up into a small bundle, placed it in the
sack. He also sought for, and fortunately found, an
old straw hat, which he put on.
Martin had now obtained all that he required, and
was about to quit the hut when he became suddenly
rooted to the spot with horror on observing the dark
countenance of an Indian gazing at him with distended
eyeballs over the edge of a hammock. His eyes, un-
accustomed to the darkness of the room, had not at
first observed that an Indian was sleeping there. He
now felt that he was lost. The savage evidently
knew him. Dreadful thoughts flashed through his
brain. He thought of the knife in his belt, and how
easily he could despatch the Indian in a moment as
he lay; but then the idea of imbruing his hands in
human blood seemed so awful that he could not bring
himself to do it.
As he looked steadily at the savage he observed
MARTIN RATTLER. 227
that his gaze was one of intense horror, and it sud-
denly occurred to him that the Indian supposed he
was a ghost! Acting upon this supposition, Martin
advanced his face slowly towards that of the Indian,
put on a dark frown, and stood for a few seconds
without uttering a word. The savage shrank back
and shuddered from head to foot. Then, with a
noiseless step, Martin retreated slowly backward to-
wards the door and passed out like a spectre—never
for a moment taking his eyes off those of the savage
until he was lost in darkness. On gaining the forest
he fled with a beating heart to his former retreat.
But his fears were groundless, for the Indian firmly
believed that Martin’s spirit had visited his hut and
carried away provisions for his journey to the land of
spirits.
Without waiting to rest, Martin no sooner reached
the scene of his adventurous leap than he fastened his
bag firmly on his shoulders and struck across the
valley in the direction of the blue mountains that
hemmed it in. Four or five hours’ hard walking
brought him to their base, and long before the rising
sun shone down upon his recent home he was over
the hills and far away, trudging onward with a weary
foot, but with a light heart, in what he believed to be
the direction of the east coast of Brazil. He did not
228 MARTIN RATTLER.
dare to rest until the rugged peaks of the mountain
range were between him and the savages; but when
he had left these far behind him, he halted about mid-
day to breakfast and repose by the margin of a de-
lightfully cool mountain stream.
“Tm gafe now!†said Martin aloud, as he threw
down his bundle beneath a spreading tree and com-
menced to prepare breakfast. “O my friend Barney,
I wish that you were here to keep me company!â€
The solitary youth looked round as if he half expected
to see the rough visage and hear the gladsome voice
of his friend; but no voice replied to his, and the
only living creature he saw was a large monkey, which
peered inquisitively down at him from among the
branches of a neighbouring bush. This reminded him
that he had left his pet Marmoset in the Indian
village, and a feeling of deep self-reproach filled his
heart. In the haste and anxiety of his flight he had
totally forgotten his little friend. But regret was
now unavailing. Marmoset was lost to him for ever.
Having kindled a small fire, Martin kneaded a large
quantity of farina in the hollow of a smooth stone,
and baked a number of flat cakes, which were soon
fired and spread out upon the ground. While thus
engaged, a snake of about six feet long and as thick
as a mnan’s arm glided past him. Martin started con-
MARTIN RATTLER. 229
vulsively, for he had never seen one of the kind
before, and he knew that the bite of some of the
snakes is deadly. Fortunately his axe was at hand.
Grasping it quickly, he killed the reptile with a single
blow. Two or three mandioca cakes, a few wild
fruits, and a draught of water from the stream, formed
the wanderer’s simple breakfast. After it was fin-
ished, he slung his hammock between two trees, and
jumping in, fell into a deep, untroubled slumber, in
which he continued all that day and until daybreak
the following morning.
After partaking of a hearty breakfast, Martin took
up his bundle and resumed his travels. That day he
descended into the level and wooded country that
succeeded the mountain range, and that night he was
obliged to encamp in a swampy place near a stagnant
lake in which several alligators were swimming, and
where the mosquitoes were so numerous that he found
it absolutely impossible to sleep. At last, in despair,
he sprang into the branches of the tree to which his
hammock was slung and ascended to the top. Here,
to his satisfaction, he found that there were scarcely
any mosquitoes, while a cool breeze fanned his fevered
brow, so he determined to spend the night in the
tree.
By binding several branches together he formed a
280 MARTIN RATTLER.
rude sort of couch, on which he lay down comfortably,
placing his knife and bow beside him, and using the
hammock rolled up as a pillow. As the sun was
setting, and while he leaned on his elbow looking
down through the leaves with much interest at the
alligators that gambolled in the reedy lake, his atten-
tion was attracted by a slight rustling in the bushes
near the foot of the tree. Looking down, he perceived
a large jaguar gliding through the underwood with
cat-like stealth. Martin now observed that a huge
alligator had crawled out of the lake, and was lying
on the bank asleep a few yards from the margin.
When the jaguar reached the edge of the bushes it
paused, and then, with one tremendous spring, seized
the alligator by the soft part beneath its tail. The
huge monster struggled for a few seconds, endeavour-
ing to reach the water, and then lay still, while the
Jaguar worried and tore at its tough hide with savage
fury. Martin was much surprised at the passive
conduct of the alligator. That it could not turn its
stiff body so as to catch the jaguar in its jaws did
not indeed surprise him, bub he wondered very much
to see the great reptile suffer pain so quietly. It
seemed to be quite paralyzed. In a few minutes the
jaguar retired a short distance. Then the alligator
made a rush for the water; but the jaguar darted
MARTIN RATTLER. 931
back and caught it again, and Martin now saw that
the jaguar was actually playing with the alligator as
a cat plays with a mouse before she kills it! During
one of the cessations of the combat, if we may call it
by that name, the alligator almost gained the water,
and in the short struggle that ensued both animals
rolled down the bank and fell into the lake. The
tables were now turned. The jaguar made for the
shore; but before it could reach it the alligator
wheeled round, opened its tremendous jaws and caught
its enemy by the middle. There was one loud splash
in the water, as the alligator’s powerful tail dashed it
into foam, and one awful roar of agony, which was
cut suddenly short and stifled as the monster dived to
the bottom with its prey; then all was silent as the
grave, and a few ripples on the surface were all that
remained to tell of the battle that had been fought
there.
Martin remained motionless on the tree top, brood-
ing over the fight which he had just witnessed, until
the deepening shadows warned him that it was time
to seek repose. Turning on his side he laid his head
on his pillow, while a soft breeze swayed the tree
gently to and fro and rocked him sound asleep.
Thus, day after day, and week after week, did
Martin Rattler wander alone through the great forests,
2382 MARTIN RATTLER.
sometimes pleasantly, and at other times with more
or less discomfort ; subsisting on game which he shot
with his arrows, and on wild fruits. He met with
many strange adventures by the way, which would
fill numerous volumes were they to be written every
one; but we must pass over many of these in silence,
that we may recount those that were most interesting.
One evening, as he was walking through a very
beautiful country, in which were numerous small
lakes and streams, he was suddenly arrested by a
crashing sound in the underwood, as if some large
animal were coming towards him; and he had barely
time to fit an arrow to his bow when the bushes in
front of him were thrust aside, and the most hideous
monster that he had ever seen appeared before his
eyes. It was a tapir; but Martin had never heard
of or seen such creatures before, although there are a
good many in some parts of Brazil.
The tapir is a very large animal—about five or six
feet long and three or four feet high. It is in appear-
ance something between an elephant and a hog. Its
nose is very long, and extends into a short proboscis ;
but there is no finger at the end of it like that of the
elephant. Its colour is a deep brownish -black, its
tough hide is covered with a thin sprinkling of strong
hairs, and its mane is thick and bristly. So thick is
MARTIN RATTLER. 233
its hide that a bullet can scarcely penetrate it; and it
can erush its way through thickets and bushes, how-
ever dense, without receiving a scratch. Although a
very terrific animal to look at, it is fortunately of a
very peaceable and timid disposition, so that it flees
from danger, and is very quick in discovering the
presence of an enemy. Sometimes it is attacked by
the jaguar, which springs suddenly upon it and fastens
its claws in its back; but the tapir’s tough hide is not
easily torn, and he gets rid of his enemy by bouncing
into the tangled bushes and bursting through them,
so that the jaguar is very soon seraped off his back!
The tapir lives as much in the water as on the land,
and delights to wallow like a pig in muddy pools. It
is, in fact, very similar in many of its habits to the
ereat hippopotamus of Africa, but is not quite so large.
It feeds entirely on vegetables, buds, fruits, and the
tender shoots of trees, and always at night. During
the daytime it sleeps. The Indians of Brazil are fond
of its flesh, and they hunt it with spears and poisoned
ALLOWS.
But Martin knew nothing of all this, and fully ex-
pected that the dreadful creature before him would
attack and kill him; for when he observed its coarse
tough-looking hide, and thought of the slender arrows
with which he was armed, he felt that he had no
234 MARTIN RATTLER.
chance, and there did not happen to be a tree near
him at the time up which he could climb.
With the energy of despair he let fly an arrow with
all his force, but the weak shaft glanced from the
tapir’s side without doing it the slightest damage.
Then Martin turned to fly, but at the same moment
the tapir did the same, to his great delight and sur-
prise. It wheeled round with a snort, and went off
crashing through the stout underwood as if it had
been grass, leaving a broad track behind it.
On another occasion he met with a formidable-
looking but comparatively harmless animal, called the
great ant-eater. This remarkable creature is about
six feet in length, with very short legs and very long
strong claws, a short curly tail, and a sharp snout,
out of which it thrusts a long narrow tongue. It can
roll itself up like a hedgehog, and when in this posi-
tion might be easily mistaken for a bundle of coarse
hay. It lives chiefly if not entirely upon ants.
When Martin discovered the great ant-eater, it was
about to begin its supper, so he watched it. The
plain was covered with ant-hills, somewhat pillar-like
in shape. At the foot of one of these the animal
made an attack, tearing up earth and sticks with its
cnormously strong claws, until it made a large hole in
the hard materials of which the hill was composed.
MARTIN RATTLER. 235
Into this hole it thrust its long tongue, and immedi-
ately the ants swarmed upon it. The creature let its
tongue rest till it was completely covered over with
thousands of ants, then it drew it into its mouth and
enoulfed them all!
As Martin had no reason in the world for attempt-
ing to shoot the great ant-eater, and as he was, more-
over, by no means sure that he could kill it if he were
to try, he passed on quietly and left this curious ani-
mal to finish its supper in peace.
CHAPTER XXIII.
Martin meets with friends, and visits the diamond mines.
NE day, after Martin had spent many weeks
in wandering alone through the forest, during
the course of which he was sometimes tempted to
despair of seeing the face of man again, he discovered
a beaten track, at the sight of which his heart
bounded with delight. It was a Saturday afternoon
when he made this discovery, and he spent the Sab-
bath day in rest beside it. For Martin had more
than once called to remembrance the words which
good Aunt Dorothy used to hear him repeat out of
the Bible—* Remember the Sabbath day, to keep it
holy.†He had many long, earnest, and serious medi-
tations in that silent forest, such as a youth would be
very unlikely to have in almost any other circum-
stances, except, perhaps, on a sick-bed; and among
other things he had been led to consider, that if he
made no difference between Saturday and Sunday, he
must certainly be breaking that commandment. So
MARTIN RATTLER. 237
he resolved thenceforth to rest on the Sabbath day ;
and he found much benefit, both to mind and body,
from this arrangement. During this particular Sab-
bath he rested beside the beaten track, and often did
he walk up and down it a short way, wondering
where it would lead him to; and several times he
prayed that he might be led by it to the habitations
of civilized men.
Next day, after breakfast, he prepared to set out;
but now he was much perplexed as to which way he
ought to go, for the track did not run in the direction
in which he had been travelling, but at right angles
to that way. While he still hesitated, the sound of
voices struck on his ear, and he almost fainted with
excitement; for besides the hope that he might now
meet with friends, there was also the fear that those
approaching might be enemies, and the sudden sound
of the human voice, which he had not heard for so
long, tended to create conflicting and almost over-
whelming feelings in his breast. Hiding quickly be-
hind a tree, he awaited the passing of the cavalcade ;
for the sounds of horses’ hoofs were now audible.
In a few minutes a string of laden mules approached,
and then six horsemen appeared, whose bronzed olive
complexions, straw-hats, and ponchos betokened them
Brazilians, As they passed, Martin hailed them in
238 MARTIN RATTLER.
an unsteady voice. They pulled up suddenly, and
drew pistols from their holsters; but on seeing only
a fair youth armed with a bow, they replaced their
weapons, and with a look of surprise rode up and
assailed him with a volley of unintelligible Portuguese.
“Do any of you speak English?†inquired Martin,
advancing.
One of the horsemen replied, “Yees, I spok one
leet. Ver’ smoll. Where you be com?â€
“T have escaped from the Indians who live in the
mountains far away over yonder. I have been wan-
dering now for many weeks in the forest; and I wish
to get to the sea-coast, or to some town where I may
get something to do, that I may be enabled to return
home.†.
“Ho!†said the horseman gravely. “You com vid
us. Ve go vid goods to de diamond mines. Git
vork dere, yees. Put you body on dat hoss.â€
As the Brazilian spoke he pointed to a spare horse,
which was led, along with several others, by a Negro.
Thanking him for his politeness, Martin seized the
horse by the mane and vaulted into the saddle, if the
rude contrivance on its back might be so designated.
The string of mules then moved on, and Martin rode
with a light heart beside this obliging stranger, con-
versing with much animation.
MARTIN RATTLER. 239
In a very short time he learned, through the
medium of his own bad Portuguese and the Brazilian’s
worse English, that he was not more than a day’s
ride from one of the diamond mines of that province
of Brazil which is named Minas Geraes; that he was
still many leagues distant from the sea; and that he
would be sure to get work at the mines if he wished
it, for the chief overseer, the Baron Fagoni, was an
amiable man, and very fond of the English, but he
could not speak their language at all, and required an
interpreter. “And,†said the Brazilian, with a look
of great dignity, “I hab de honour for be de ’ter-
preter.â€
“Ah!†exclaimed Martin, “then I am in good for-
tune, for I shall have a friend at court.â€
The interpreter smiled slightly and bowed, after
which they proceeded for some time in silence.
Next evening they arrived at the mines; and, after
seeing to the comfort of his horse, and inquiring rather
hastily as to the welfare of his family, the interpreter
conducted Martin to the overseer’s house, in order to
introduce him.
The Baron Fagoni stood smoking in the doorway
of his dwelling as they approached, and the first
impression that Martin received of him was anything
but agreeable.
240 MARTIN RATTLER.
He was a large, powerful man, with an enormous
red beard and moustache, and a sombrero-like hat
that concealed nearly the whole of his face. He
seemed an irritable man, too, for he jerked his arms
about and stamped in a violent manner as they drew
near, and instead of waiting to receive them, he en-
tered the house hastily and shut the door in their
faces.
“The Baron would do well to take lessons in civil-
ity,†said Martin, colouring as he turned to the inter-
preter.
“ Ah, he be a leet pecoolair, sometime! Nev’r mind.
Ve vill go to him.â€
So saying, the interpreter opened the door and en-
tered the hall where the overseer was seated at a desk
writing, as if in violent haste. Seeing that he did
not mean to take notice of them, the interpreter spoke
to him in Portuguese; but he was soon interrupted
by a sharp reply, uttered in a harsh, grating voice,
by the overseer, who did not look up or cease from
his work.
Again the interpreter spoke ag if in some surprise ;
but he was cut short by the overseer uttering, in a
deep stern voice, the single word “ Obey.â€
With a low bow the interpreter turned away, and
taking Martin by the arm led him into an inner
MARTIN RATTLER. 241
apartment, where, having securely fastened the win-
dow, he said to him, “ De Baron say you be von black-
guard tief; go ’bout contrie for steal diamonds. He
make pris’ner ov you. Adios.â€
So saying, the interpreter made his bow and re-
tired, locking the door behind him, and leaving Martin
standing in the middle of the room, staring before him
in speechless amazement.
16
CHAPTER XXIV.
The diamond mines—More and more astonishing !
F Martin Rattler was amazed at the treatment he
l experienced at the hands of his new acquaint-
ances on arriving, he had occasion to be very much
more surprised at what occurred three hours after his
incarceration.
It was getting dark when he was locked up, and
for upwards of two hours he was left in total dark-
ness. Moreover, he began to feel very hungry, having
eaten nothing since mid-day. He was deeply engaged
in devising plans for his escape when he was inter-
rupted by the door being unlocked and a Negro slave
entering with four magnificent candles, made of bees’-
wax, which he placed upon the table. Then he re-
turned to the door, where another slave handed him
a tray containing dishes, knives and forks, and, in
short, all the requisites for laying out a supper-table.
Having spread a clean linen cloth on the board, he
arranged covers for two, and going to the door placed
his head to one side and regarded his arrangements
MARTIN RATTLER. 243
with much complacency, and without paying the
slightest attention to Martin, who pinched himself in
order to make sure he was not dreaming.
In a few minutes the second Negro returned with
an enormous tray, on which were dishes of all sizes,
from under whose covers came the most savoury odours
imaginable. Having placed these symmetrically on
the board, both slaves retired and relocked the door
without saying a word.
At last it began to dawn on Martin’s imagination
that the overseer must be an eccentric individual, who
found pleasure in taking his visitors by surprise.
But although this seemed a possible solution of the
difficulty, he did not feel satisfied with it. He could
with difficulty resist the temptation to attack the
viands, however, and was beginning to think of doing
this, regardless of all consequences, when the door
again opened and the Baron Fagoni entered, relocked
the door, put the key in his pocket, and standing
before his prisoner with folded arms, gazed at him
intently from beneath his sombrero.
Martin could not stand this. “Sir,†said he, starting
up, “if this is a joke, you have carried it far enough ;
and if you really detain me here a prisoner, every
feeling of honour ought to deter you from adding in-
sult to injury.â€
244, MARTIN RATTLER.
To this sternly-delivered speech the Baron made no
reply, but springing suddenly upon Martin, he grasped
him in his powerful arms, and crushed him to his |
broad chest till he almost broke every bone in his
body !
“Och! cushla, bliss yer young face! sure it’s yersilf,
an’ no mistake! Kape still, Martin, dear. Let me
look at ye, darlint! Ah! then, isn’t it my heart
that’s been broken for months an’ months past about
ye?â€
Reader, it would be utterly in vain for me to at-
tempt to describe either the words that flowed from
the lips of Martin Rattler and Barney O’Flannagan on
this happy occasion, or the feelings that filled their
swelling hearts. The speechless amazement of Martin,
the ejaculatory exclamations of the Baron Fagoni, the
rapid questions and brief replies, are all totally inde-
seribable. Suffice it to say, that for full quarter of
an hour they exclaimed, shouted, and danced round
each other, without coming to any satisfactory know-
ledge of how each had got to the same place, except
that Barney at last discovered that Martin had tray-
elled there by chance, and he had reached the mines
by “intuition.†Having settled this point, they
sobered down a little.
“ Now, Martin, darlint,†cried the Irishman, throw-
MARTIN RATTLER. 245
ing aside his hat for the first time, and displaying his
well-known jolly visage, of which the forehead, eyes,
and nose alone survived the general inundation of red
hair, “yell be hungry, I’ve small doubt; so sit ye
down, lad, to supper, and you'll tell me yer story as
ye go along, and afther that I'll tell ye mine, while I
smoke my pipe—the ould cutty, boy, that has comed
through fire and wather, sound as a bell and blacker
than iver !â€
The Baron held up the well-known instrument of
fumigation, as he spoke, in triumph.
Supper was superb. There were venison steaks,
armadillo cutlets, tapir hash, iguana pie, and an im-
mense variety of fruits and vegetables, that would have
served a dozen men, besides cakes and splendid coffee.
“You live well here, Barney—I beg pardon, Baron
Fagoni,†said Martin, during a pause in their meal;
“how in the world did you come by that name ?â€
Barney winked expressively. “Ah, boy, I wish I
may niver have a worse. Ye see, when I first comed
here, about four months ago, I found that the mine
was owned by an Irish gintleman; an’, like all the
race, he’s a trump. He took to me at wance when
he hear’d my voice, and then he took more to me
when he comed to know me character; and says he
to me wan day, ‘ Barney,’ says he, ‘I’m gettin’ tired
246 MARTIN RATTLER.
o’ this kind o’ life now, and if ye'll agree to stop here
as overseer, and sind me the proceeds o’ the mine to
Rio Janeiro, a great city on the sea-coast, an’ the
capital o’ Brazil, I'll give ye a good share o’ the
profits. But, says he, ‘ye'll need to pretind ye’re a
Roosian, or a Pole, or somethin’ o’ that kind: for the
fellows in thim parts are great rascals, and there’s a
few Englishmen among them who would soon find
out that ye’re only a Jack-tar before the mast, and
would chate ye at no allowance. But if ye could
spake no language under the sun but the gibberish
pecooliar to the unbeknown provinces o’ Siberia, ye
could escape detection as far as yer voice is consarned ;
and by lettin’ yer beard grow as long as possible, and
dressin’ yersilf properly, ye might pass and be as dig-
nified as the great Mogul.’
“*Musha!’ said L ‘but if I don’t spake me own
tongue I'll have to be dumb altogither,
“No fear, says he; ‘Ill tache ye enough Portu-
guese in a month or two to begin with, an’ ye’ll pick
it up aisy after that. And sure enough I began,
tooth and nail, and, by hard workin’, got on faster
than I expected; for I can spake as much o’ the
lingo now as tides me over needcessities, and I under-
stand most o’ what’s said to me. Anyhow, I giner-
ally see what they’re drivin’ at.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. O47
“So, then, you’re actually in charge of the mine?â€
said Martin in surprise.
“ Jist so, boy; but I’m tired of it already—it’s by
no means so pleasant as I expected it would be—so
Tm thinkin’ o’ lavin’ it, and takin’ to the say again.
Tm longin’ dreadful to see the salt wather wance
more.â€
“But what will the owner say, Barney? won’t he
have cause to complain of your breaking your en-
gagement ?â€
“ Niver a bit, boy. He tould me, before we parted,
that if I wanted to quit I was to hand over the con-
sarn to the interpreter, who is an honest fellow, I
belave ; so I’m jist goin’ to pocket a dimond or two,
and ask lave to take them home wid me. I'll be off
in a week, if all goes well. An’ now, Martin, fill yer
glass—ye'll find the wine is not bad after wan or
two glasses—an’ I'll tell ye about my adventures
since I saw ye last.â€
“But you have not explained about your name,â€
said Martin.
“Och! the fact is, that when I comed here I
fortunately fell in with the owner first, and we spoke
almost intirely in Irish, so nobody understood where
J comed from; and the interpreter hear’d the master
call me by my name, so he wint off and said to’ the
248 MARTIN RATTLER.
people that a great Barono Flanagoni had come, and
was up at the house wid the master. But we cor-
rected him afterwards, and gave him to understand
that I was the Baron Fagoni. I had some trouble
with the people at first, after the owner left; but I
pounded wan or two o’ the biggest o’ them to sich
a extint that their own friends hardly knew them,
an’ iver since they’ve been mighty civil.â€
Having carefully filled the black pipe, and in-
volved himself in his own favourite atmosphere, the
Baron Fagoni then proceeded to relate his adventures,
and dilated upon them to such an extent that five or
six pipes were filled and finished ere the story came
to a close. Martin also related his adventures, to
which his companion listened with such breathless
attention and earnestness that his pipe was constantly
going out, and the two friends did not retire to rest
till near daybreak.
The substance of the Baron’s narrative was as fol-
lows :—
At the time that he had been so suddenly separated
from his friend, Barney had overcome many of his
opponents, but at length he was overpowered by
numbers, and his arms were firmly bound; after
which he was roughly driven before them through
the woods for several days, and was at length taken
MARTIN RATTLER. 249
to their village among the mountains. Here he
remained a close prisoner for three weeks, shut up
in a small hut, and bound by a strong rope to a post.
Food was taken to him by an old Indian woman, who
paid no attention at first to what he said to her, for
the good reason that she did not understand a word
of English. The persuasive eloquence of her pris-
oner’s tones, however, or perhaps his brogue, seemed
in the course of a few days to have made an impres-
sion on her; for she condescended to smile at the
unintelligible compliments which Barney lavished upon
her in the hope of securing her good-will.
During all this time the Irishman’s heart was torn
with conflicting feelings; and although, from the
mere force of habit, he could jest with the old woman
when she paid her daily visits, there was no feeling
of fun in his bosom, but, on the contrary, a deep and
overwhelming sorrow, which showed itself very evi-
dently on his expressive face. He groaned aloud
when he thought of Martin, whom he never expected
again to see; and he dreaded every hour the ap-
proach of his savage captors, who, he fully expected,
retained him in order to put him to death.
One day, while he was sitting In a very discon-
solate mood, the Indian woman entered with his
usual dinner—a plate of thick soup and a coarse
250 MARTIN RATTLER.
cake. Barney smiled upon her as usual, and then,
letting his eyes fall on the ground, sighed deeply,
for his heart was heavier than usual that day. As
the woman was about to go, he looked earnestly and
gravely in her face, and putting his large hand gently
on her head, patted her gray hairs. This tender
action seemed to affect the old woman more than
usual. She laid her hand on Barney’s arm, and
looked as if she wished to speak. Then turning
suddenly from him, she drew a small knife from her
girdle and dropped it on the ground, as if accidentally,
while she left the hut and refastened the door.
Barney’s heart leaped. He seized the knife and con-
cealed it hastily in his bosom, and then ate his dinner
with more than ordinary zest, for now he possessed
the means of cutting the strong rope that bound him.
He waited with much impatience until night
closed over the Indian village; and then cutting his
bonds, he tore down the rude and rather feeble fast-
enings of the door. In another instant he was dash-
ing along at full speed through the forest, without
hat or coat, and with the knife clutched in his right
hand! Presently he heard cries behind him, and
redoubled his speed, for now he knew that the sav-
ages had discovered his escape and were in pursuit.
But, although a good runner, Barney was no match
MARTIN RATTLER. 251
for the lithe and naked Indians. They rapidly gained
on him, and he was about to turn at bay and fight
for his life, when he observed water gleaming through
the foliage on his left. Dashing down a glade, he
came to the edge of a broad river with a rapid cur-
rent. Into this he sprang recklessly, intending to
swim with the stream; but ere he lost his footing
he heard the low, deep thunder of a cataract a short
distance below! Drawing back in terror, he regained
the bank, and waded up a considerable distance in
the shallow water, so as to leave no trace of his foot-
steps. Then he leaped upon a rock, and catching
hold of the lower branches of a large tree, drew him-
self up among the dense foliage, just as the yelling
savages rushed with wild tumult to the water’s edge.
Here they paused, as if baffled. They spoke in
rapid, vehement tones for a few seconds, and then
one party hastened down the banks of the stream
towards the fall, while another band searched the
banks above. .
Barney’s heart fell as he sat panting in the tree,
for he knew that they would soon discover him.
But he soon resolved on a bold expedient. Slipping
down from the tree, he ran deliberately back towards
the village, and, as he drew near, he followed the
regular beaten track that led towards it. On the
bo
Or
bo
MARTIN RATTLER.
way he encountered one or two savages hastening
after the pursuing party; but he leaped lightly into
the bushes, and lay still till they were past. Then
he ran on, skirted round the village, and pushed into
the woods in an entirely opposite direction from the
one in which he had first set out. Keeping by one
of the numerous tracks that radiated from the village
into the forest, he held on at top speed, until his
progress was suddenly arrested by a stream about
twenty yards broad. It was very deep, and he was
about to plunge in, in order to swim across, when he
observed a small montaria or canoe lying on the
bank. This he launched quickly, and observing that
the river took a bend a little farther down, and
appeared to proceed in the direction he wished to
pursue—namely, away from the Indian village—he
paddled down the rapid stream as fast as he could.
The current was very strong, so that his little bark
flew down it like an arrow, and on more than one
occasion narrowly missed being dashed to pieces on
the rocks which here and there rose above the stream.
In about two hours Barney came to a place where
the stream took another bend to the left, and soon
after the canoe swept out upon the broad river into
which he had at first so nearly plunged. He was
a long way below the fall now, for its sound was in-
MARTIN RATTUER. 253
audible; but it was no time to abate his exertions.
The Indians might be still in pursuit; so he con-
tinued to paddle all that night, and did not take rest
until daybreak. Then he slept for two hours, ate
a few wild fruits, and continued his journey.
In the course of the next day, to his great joy, he
overtook a trading-canoe, which had been up another
tributary of this river, and was descending with part
of a cargo of india-rubber shoes. None of the men,
of whom there were four, could speak English ; but
they easily saw from the Irishman’s condition that
he had escaped from enemies and was in distress, so
they took him on board, and were glad to avail them-
selves of his services, for, as we have before men-
tioned, men are not easily procured for voyaging in
those parts of Brazil. Three weeks after this they
arrived at a small town, where the natives were
busily engaged in the manufacture of shoes, bottles,
and other articles of india-rubber, and here Barney
found employment for a short time.
The seringa, or india-rubber tree, grows plentifully
in some parts of Brazil, and many hundreds of the
inhabitants are employed in the manufacture of shoes.
The india-rubber is the juice of the tree, and flows
from it when an incision is made. This juice is
poured into moulds and left to harden. It is of a
254, ; MARTIN RATTLER.
yellowish colour naturally, and is blackened in the
course of preparation. Barney did not stay long
here. Shoemaking, he declared, was not his calling
by any means; so he seized the first opportunity he
had of joining a party of traders going into the in-
terior, in the direction of the diamond districts. The
journey was long and varied—sometimes by canoe
and sometimes on the backs of mules and horses—and
many extraordinary adventures did he go through
ere he reached the diamond mines; and when at
length he did so, great was his disappointment. In-
stead of the glittering caves which his vivid imag-
ination had pictured, he found that there were no
caves at all; that the diamonds were found by wash-
ing in the muddy soil; and, worst of all, that when
found they were dim and unpolished, so that they
seemed no better than any other stone. However, he
resolved to continue there for a short time, in order
to make a little money; but now that Martin had
arrived, he thought that they could not do better
than make their way to the coast as fast as possible,
and g@o to sea.
“ The only thing I have to regret,†he said, at the con-
clusion of his narrative, “is that I left Grampus behind
me. But arrah! I came off from the savages in such a
hurry that I had no time at all to tell him I was goin’!â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 255
Having sat till daybreak, the two friends went to
bed to dream of each other and of home.
Next morning Barney took Martin to visit the
diamond mines. On the way they passed a band of
Negro slaves who encircled a large fire, the weather
being very cold. It was at that time about the end of
July, which is one of the coldest months in the year.
Tn this part of Brazil summer and winter are reversed
—the coldest months being May, June, and July; the
hottest, November, December, January, and February.
Minas Geraes, the diamond district, is one of the
richest provinces of Brazil. The inhabitants are
almost entirely occupied in mining or in supplying
the miners with the necessaries of life. Diggers and
shopkeepers are the two principal classes, and of
these the latter are best off; for their trade is steady
and. lucrative, while the success of the miners is very
uncertain. Frequently a large sum of money and
much time are expended in mining without any
adequate result; but the merchants always find a
ready sale for their merchandise, and, as they take
diamonds and gold-dust in exchange, they generally
realize large profits, and soon become rich. The poor
miner is like the gambler. He digs on in hope,
sometimes finding barely enough to supply his wants,
at other times making a fortune suddenly, but never
256 MARTIN RATTLER.
giving up in despair, because he knows that at every
handful of earth he turns up he may perhaps find
a diamond worth hundreds or, it may be, thousands
of pounds.
Cidade Diamantina—the City of Diamonds—is the
capital of the province. It is a large city, with many
fine churches and buildings; and the whole popula-
tion, consisting of more than six thousand souls, are
engaged, directly or indirectly, in mining. Every
one who owns a few slaves employs them in washing
the earth for gold and diamonds.
The mine of which Barney had so unexpectedly
become overseer was a small one, in a remote part of
the district, situated among the mountains, and far
distant from the City of Diamonds. There were
only a few huts, rudely built and roofed with palm-
leaves, besides a larger building, or cottage, in which
the Baron Fagoni resided.
“Tis a strange life they lead here,†said Barney,
as he led Martin down a gorge of the mountains
towards a small spot of level ground on which the
slaves were at work—‘“a strange life, and by no
means a pleasant wan, for the feedin’ is none o’ the
best and the work very sevare.â€
“Why, Barney, if I may judge from last night’s
supper, the feeding seems to be excellent.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 257
‘
“Thrue, boy, the Baron Fagoni feeds well, bekase
he’s the cock o’ the roost; but the poor Naygurs are
not overly well fed, and the eraturs are up to their
knees in wather all day, washing di’monds; so they
suffer much from rheumatiz and colds. Och, but it’s
murther intirely, an’ I’ve more than wance felt in-
clined to fill their pockets with di’monds and _ set
them all free! Jist look, now; there they are, hard
at it.â€
As he spoke they arrived at the mine. The ground
in the vicinity was all cut up and dug out to a con-
siderable depth, and a dozen Negroes were standing
under a shed washing the earth, while others were
engaged in the holes excavating the material. While
Martin watched them his friend explained the pro-
cess,
The different kinds of soil through which it is
necessary to cut before reaching the diamond deposit
are, first, about twenty feet of reddish sandy soil;
then about eight feet of a tough yellowish clay;
beneath this lies a layer of coarse reddish sand,
below which is the peculiar soil in which diamonds
are found. It is called by the miners the cascalho,
and consists of loose gravel, the pebbles of which are
rounded and polished, having at some previous era
been subject to the action of running water. The
17
258 MARTIN RATTLER.
bed varies in thickness from one to four feet, and the
pebbles are of various kinds, but when there are
many of a species called esmerilo preto, the cascalho
is considered to be rich in diamonds.
Taking Martin round to the back of the shed,
Barney showed him a row of troughs, about three
feet square, close to the edge of a pond of water.
These troughs are called bacos. In front of each
stood a Negro slave up to the knees in water. Each
had a wooden plate, with which he dashed water
upon the rough cascalho as it was thrown into the
trough by another slave. By this means, and by
stirring it with a hoe, the earth and sand are washed
away. Two overseers were closely watching the
process, for it is during this part of the operation
that the largest diamonds are found. These overseers
were seated on elevated seats, each being armed with
a long leathern whip, to keep a sharp look out, for
the slaves are expert thieves.
After the cascalho had been thus purified it was
carefully removed to the shed to be finally washed.
Here seven slaves were seated on the side of a
small canal, about four feet broad, with their legs in
the water nearly up to their knees. This canal is
called the lavadeiva. Each man had a small wooden
platter, into which another slave, who stood behind
MARTIN RATTLER. 259
him, put a shovelful of purified cascalho. The bateia,
or platter, was then filled with water and washed
with the utmost care several times, being closely
examined after each washing, and the diamonds
picked out. Sometimes many platefuls were ex-
amined but nothing found; at other times several
diamonds were found in one plate. While Martin
was looking on with much curiosity and interest, one
of the slaves uttered an exclamation and held up a
minute stone between his finger and thumb.
“Ah! good luck to ye, lad!†said Barney, advane-
ing and taking the diamond which had been dis-
covered. “See here, Martin; there’s the thing, lad,
that sparkles on the brow o’ beauty, and gives the
Naygurs rheumatiz—â€
“Not to mention their usefulness in providing the
great Baron Fagoni with a livelihood,†added Martin,
with a smile.
Barney laughed, and going up to the place where
the two overseers were seated, dropped the precious
gem into a plate of water placed between them for
the purpose of receiving the diamonds as they were
found.
“They git fifteen or twinty a day sometimes,†said
Barney, as they retraced their steps to the cottage ;
“and Dve hear’d o’ them getting stones worth many
260 MARTIN RATTLER.
thousands 0’ pounds; but the biggest they iver found
since I comed here was not worth more than four
hundred.â€
“And what do you do with them, Barney, when
they are found?†inquired Martin.
“ Sind them to Rio Janeiro, lad, where my employer
sells them. I don’t know how much he makes a year
by it, but the thing must pay, for he’s very liberal
with his cash, and niver forgits to pay wages. There’s
always a lot o’ gould-dust found in the bottom o’ the
bateia after each washing, and that is carefully
collected and sold. But, arrah! I wouldn’t give wan
snifter o’ the say-breezes for all the di’monds in Brazil!â€
As Barney said this he entered his cottage and
flung down his hat with the air of a man who was
resolved to stand it no longer.
“But why don’t you wash on your own account ?â€
cried Martin. “What say you—shall we begin to-
gether? We may make our fortune the first week,
perhaps !â€
Barney shook his head. “No, no, boy; Pve no
faith in my luck with the di’monds or gould. Never-
theless I have hear’d o’ men makin’ an awful heap o’
money that way, partiklarly wan man that made his
fortin with wan stone.†—
“Who was that lucky dog?†asked Martin.
MARTIN RATTLER. 261
“Well, ye see, it happened this way. There’s a
custom hereaway that slaves are allowed to work on
Sundays and holidays on their own account; but
when the mines was a government consarn this was
not allowed, and the slaves were the most awful
thieves livin’, and often made off with some o’ the
largest dimonds. Well, there was a man named
Juiz de Paz, who owned a small shop, and used to go
down now and then to Rio de Janeiro to buy goods.
Wan evenin’ he returned from wan o’ his long
journeys, and, bein’ rather tired, wint to bed. He
was jist goin’ off into a comfortable doze when there
came a terrible bumpin’ at the door.
“* Hallo!†cried Juiz, growlin’ angrily in the
Portugee tongue; ‘ what d’ye want ?’
“There was no answer but another bumpin’ at the
door. So up he jumps, and, takin’ down a big
blunderbuss that hung over his bed, opened the door,
an’ seized a Naygur be the hair o’ the head!
“«Q massa! O massa! let him go! Got dimond
for to sell!’
“On hearin’ this, Juiz let go, and found that the
slave had come to offer for sale a large dimond,
which weighed about two pennyweights and a third.
“« What d’ye ask for it?’ said Juiz, with sparklin’
eyes.
262 MARTIN RATTLER.
“*Six hundred mil-reis, answered the Nayeur.
“This was about equal to one hundred and eighty
pounds stirling. Without more words about it, he
paid down the money, and the slave went away.
Juiz lost his sleep that night. He went and tould
the neighbours he had forgot a piece of important
business in Rio and must go back at wance. So
back he went, and stayed some time in the city,
tryin’ to git his dimond safely sold; for it was sich
a big wan that he feared the government fellows
might hear o’t, in which case he would have got tin
years’ transportation to Angola on the coast of Africa.
At last, however, he got rid of it for twenty thousand
mil-reis, which is about six thousand pounds. It was
all paid to him in hard dollars, and he nearly went
out o’ his wits for joy. But he was brought down a
peg nixt day, when he found that the same di’mond
was sold for nearly twice as much as he had got for
it. Howiver, he had made a pretty considerable
fortin; an’ he’s now the richest dimond and gould
merchant in the district.â€
“A lucky fellow certainly,†said Martin. “But I
must say I have no taste for such chance work; so
I’m quite ready to start for the sea-coast whenever it
suits the Baron Fagoni’s convenience.â€
While they were speaking they were attracted by
MARTIN RATTLER. 263
voices outside the cottage, which sounded as if in
altercation. In another minute the door burst open,
and a man entered hurriedly, followed by the inter-
preter.
“Your overseer is impertinent!†exclaimed the
man, who was a tall swarthy Brazilian. “I wish to
buy a horse or a good mule, and he won't let me
have one. Jam not a beggar; I offer to pay.â€
The man spoke in Portuguese, and Barney replied
in the same language,—
“You can have a horse if you pay for 2.â€
The Brazilian replied by throwing a heavy bag of
dollars on the table.
“ All right,†said Barney, turning to his interpreter
and conversing with him in an under-tone. “Give
him what he requires.†So saying he bowed the
Brazilian out of the room, and returned to the
enjoyment of his black pipe, which had been inter-
rupted by the incident.
“That man seems in a hurry,†said Martin.
“So he is. My interpreter tells me that he is
quite like one o’ the blackguards that sometimes go
about the mines doin’ mischief, and he’s in hot haste
to be away. I shouldn’t wonder if the spalpeen
has been stealin’ gould or dimonds and wants to
escape. But of course I’ve nothin’ to do with that,
264 MARTIN RATTLER.
unless I was sure of it; and I’ve a horse or two to
sell, and he has money to pay for it, so he’s welcome.
He says he is makin’ straight for the say-coast; and
with your lave, Martin, my boy, you and I will be
doin’ that same in a week after this, and say good-bye
to the dimond mines,â€
CHAPTER XXV.
New scenes and pleasant travelling.
NEW and agreeable sensation is a pleasant
thing. It was on as bright an evening as
ever shone upon Brazil, and in as fair a scene as one
could wish to behold, that Martin Rattler and his friend
Barney experienced a new sensation. On the wide
campos, on the flower-bedecked and grassy plains,
they each bestrode a fiery charger; and in the exulta-
tion of health and strength and liberty, they swept
over the greensward of the undulating campos as
light as the soft wind that fanned their bronzed
cheeks, as gay in heart as the buzzing insects that
hovered. above the brilliant flowers.
“Qh, this is best of all!†shouted Martin, turning
his sparkiing eyes to Barney, as he reined up his steed
after a gallop that caused its nostrils to expand and
its eyes to dilate. “There’s nothing like it! A fiery
charger that can’t and won’t tive, and a glorious sweep
4?
of plain like that! Huzza! whoop And loosening
266 MARTIN RATTLER.
the rein of his willing horse, away he went again in
a wild headlong career.
“Och, boy, pull up, or yell kill the baste!†cried
Barney, who thundered along at Martin’s side enjoying
to the full the spring of his powerful horse; for
Barney had spent the last farthing of his salary on
the two best steeds the country could produce, being
determined, as he said, to make the last overland
voyage on clipper-built animals which, he wisely con-
cluded, would fetch a good price at the end of the
journey. “Pull up! dye hear? They can’t stand
goin’ at that pace. Back yer topsails, ye young
rascal, or Pll board ye in a jiffy.â€
“How can I pull up with that before me?†cried
Martin, pointing to a wide ditch or gully that lay in
front of them. “TI must go over that first.†.
“Go over that!†cried Barney, endeavouring to
rein in his horse, and looking with an anxious expres-
sion at the chasm. “It’s all very well for you to talk
0’ goin’ over, ye feather, but fifteen stun—— Ah, then,
won't ye stop? Bad luck to him, he’s got the bit in
his teeth! Oh then, ye ugly baste, go, and my blessin’
go with ye!â€
The leap was inevitable. Martin went over like
a deer. Barney shut his eyes, seized the pommel of
the saddle, and went at it like a thunderbolt. In the
MARTIN RATTLER. 267
excitement of the moment he shouted in a stentorian
voice, “Clap on all sail! dye hear? Stun-sails and
sky-scrapers! Kape her steady! Hooray!â€
It was well for Barney that he had seized the
saddle. Even as it was he received a tremendous
blow from the horse’s head as it took the leap and
was thrown back on its haunches when it cleared the
ditch, which it did nobly.
“Hallo, old boy! not hurt, I hope,†said Martin,
suppressing his laughter as his comrade scrambled on
to the saddle. “ You travel about on the back of
your horse at full gallop like a circus rider.â€
“Whist, darlint, I do belave he has damaged my
faygur-head. What a nose I’ve got! Sure I can see
it mesilf without squintin’.â€
“So you have, Barney. It’s a little swelled, but
never mind. We must all learn by experience, you
know. So come along.â€
“ Hould on, ye spalpeen, till I git my wind!â€
But Martin was off again at full speed, and Barney’s
horse, scorning to be left behind, took the bit again
in its teeth and went—as he himself expressed it—
“sereamin’ before the wind.†A new sensation is not
always and necessarily an agreeable thing. Martin
and Barney found it so on the evening of that same
day, as they reclined (they could not sit) by the side
268 MARTIN RATTLER.
of their fire on the campo under the shelter of one of
the small trees which grew here and there at wide in-
tervals on the plain. They had left the diamond mine
early that morning, and their first day on horseback
proved to them that there are shadows as well as lights
in equestrian life. Their only baggage was a single
change of apparel and a small bag of diamonds—the
latter being the product of the mine during the Baron
Fagoni’s reign, and which that worthy was conveying
faithfully to his employer. During the first part of
the day they had ridden through a hilly and wooded
country, and towards evening they emerged upon one
of the smaller campos which occur here and there in
the district.
“Martin,†said Barney, as he lay smoking his pipe,
“’tis a pity that there’s no pleasure in this world with-
out something cross-grained into it. My own feelin’s
is as if I had been lately passed through a stamping
machine.â€
“Wrong, Barney, as usual,†said Martin, who was
busily engaged concluding supper with an orange.
“Tf we had pleasures without discomforts we wouldn’t
half enjoy them. We need lights and shadows in
life—what are you grinning at, Barney ?â€
“Oh, nothin’! only ye’re a re-markable philosopher,
when ye’re in the vein.â€
MARTIN RATTLER. 269
“Tis always in vain to talk philosophy to you,
Barney, so good night t’ye. Oh, dear me, I wish I
could sit down! but there’s no alternative—either bolt
upright or quite flat.â€
In quarter of an hour they both forgot pleasures
and sorrows alike in sleep. Next day the sun rose
on the edge of the campo as it does out of the ocean,
streaming across its grassy billows, and tipping the
ridges as with ruddy gold. At first Martin and
Barney did not enjoy the lovely scene, for they felt
stiff and sore; but after half-an-hour’s ride they began
to recover, and when the sun rose in all its glory on
the wide plain, the feelings of joyous, bounding freedom
that such scenes always engender obtained the mastery,
and they coursed along in silent delight.
The campo was hard, composed chiefly of a stiff red
clay soil, and covered with short grass in most places;
but here and there were rank bushes of long hairy
grasses, around and amongst which grew a multitude
of the most exquisitely beautiful flowerets and plants
of elegant forms. Wherever these flowers flourished
very luxuriantly, there were single trees of stunted
growth and thick bark, which seldom rose above
fifteen or twenty feet. Besides these there were rich
flowering myrtles and here and there a grotesque
cactus or two.
270 MARTIN RATTLER.
Under one of these trees they reined up after a ride
of two hours, and picketing their horses, prepared
breakfast. It was soon despatched,and then remounting,
away they went once more over. the beautiful plains.
About mid-day, as they were hasting towards the
shelter of a grove which appeared opportunely on the
horizon, Barney said suddenly,—
“ Martin, lad, we’re lost! We're out of our course,
for sartin.â€
“Tve been thinking that for some time, Barney,â€
replied Martin; “but you have your compass, and we
can surely make the coast by dead reckoning—eh ?â€
“True, lad, we can; but it’ll cost us a dale o° tackin’
to make up for leeway. Ah, good luck to ye! here’s
a friend ’ll help us.â€
As he spoke a herd of wild cattle dashed out of the
grove and scampered over the plain, followed by a
herdsman on horseback. Seeing that he was in eager
pursuit of an animal which he wished to lasso, they
followed him quietly and watched his movements.
Whirling the noose round his head, he threw it
adroitly in such a manner that the bull put one of its
legs within the coil. Then he reined up suddenly,
and the animal was thrown on its back. At the same
moment the lasso broke, and the bull recovered its feet
and continued its wild flight.
MARTIN RATTLER. 271
“ Good-day, friend,†said Barney, galloping towards
the disappointed herdsman and addressing him in Por-
tuguese, “could you show us the road to Rio? We've
lost it entirely.â€
The man pointed sulkily in the direction in which
they were going, and, having mended his lasso, he
wheeled about and galloped after the herd of cattle.
“Bad luck to yer manners!†said Barney, as he
gazed after him. “But what can ye expect from the
poor cratur? He niver larned better. Come along,
Martin ; we'll rest here a while.â€
They were soon under the shelter of the trees, and
having fastened their horses to one of them, they pro-
ceeded to search for water. While thus employed,
Barney shouted to his companion, “Come here, lad ;
look here.â€
There was something in the tone of the Irishman’s
voice that startled Martin, and he sprang hastily
towards him. Barney was standing with his arms
crossed upon his chest and his head bowed forward, as
he gazed with a solemn expression on the figure of a
man at his feet.
“Tg he ill?†inquired Martin, stooping and lifting
his hand. Starting back as he dropped it, he ex-
claimed, “ Dead !â€
“ Ay, boy, he has gone to his last account. Look
272 MARTIN RATTLER.
at him again, Martin. It was he who came to the
2
mine a week ago to buy a horse, and now——†Barney
sighed as he stooped and turned the body over in
order to ascertain whether he had been murdered, but
there were no marks of violence to be seen. There
was bread, too, in his wallet; so they could come to
no other conclusion than that the unhappy man had
been seized with fatal illness in the lonesome wood
and died there.
As they searched his clothes they found a small
leathern bag, which, to their amazement, was filled
with gold-dust, and in the midst of the gold was
another smaller bag containing several small diamonds.
“Ha!†exclaimed Martin, “that explains his hurry.
No doubt he had made off with these, and was anxious
to avoid pursuit.â€
“No doubt of it,’ said Barney. “Well, thief or no
thief, we must give the poor eratur dacent burial.
There’s not a scrap o’ paper to tell who he is or where
he came from—a sure sign that he wasn’t what he
should ha’ been. Ah, Martin, what will we not do
for the sake o money? and, after all, we can’t keep it
long. May the Almighty niver let you or me set our
hearts on it!â€
They dug a shallow grave with their hands in a
sandy spot where the soil was loose, in which they
MARTIN RATTLER. 278
deposited the body of the unfortunate man, and then
remounting their horses, rode away and left him in
his lonely resting-place.
For many days did Martin and Barney travel
through the land on horseback, now galloping over
open campos, anon threading their way through the
forest, and sometimes toiling slowly up the mountain
sides. The aspect of the country varied continually
as they advanced, and the feelings of excessive hilarity
with which they commenced the journey began to
subside as they became accustomed to it.
One evening they were toiling slowly up a steep
range of hills which had been the prospect in front of
them the whole of that day. As they neared the
summit of the range Martin halted at a stream to
drink, and Barney advanced alone. Suddenly Martin
was startled by a loud ery, and looking up he saw
Barney on his knees with his hands clasped before
him. Rushing up the hill, Martin found his comrade
with his face flushed and the tears coursing down his
cheeks as he stared before him.
“Look at it, Martin, dear!†he cried, starting up
and flinging his cap in the air, and shouting like a
madman. “The say! my own native illiment! the
beautiful ocean! Och, darlint, my blessin’ on ye!
Little did I think to see you more—hooray !â€
18
274 MARTIN RATTLER.
Barney sang and danced till he sank down on the
erass exhausted ; and, to say truth, Martin felt much
difficulty in restraining himself from doing likewise,
for before him was spread out the bright ocean,
gleaming in the light of the sinking sun, and calm
and placid as a mirror. It was indeed a glorious
sight to these two sailors, who had not seen the sea
for nearly two years. It was like coming suddenly
face to face, after a long absence, with an old and
much-loved friend.
Although visible, the sea, however, was still a long
way off from the Serra dos Orgaos, on which they
stood. But their steeds were good, and it was not
long ere they were both rolling like dolphins in the
beautiful bay of Rio de Janeiro.
Here Barney delivered up the gold and diamonds to
his employer, who paid him liberally for his services,
and entertained them both hospitably while they re-
mained in the city. The bag of gold and diamonds
which had been found on the body of the dead man
they appropriated, as it was absolutely impossible to
discover the rightful owner. Barney’s friend bought
it of them at full price, and when they embarked,
soon after, on board a homeward-bound ship, each
had four hundred pounds in his pocket!
As they sailed out of the noble harbour, Martin
MARTIN RATTLER. 275
sat on the poop gazing at the receding shore while
thick-coming memories crowded on his brain.
His imagination flew back to the day when he first
landed on the coast and escaped with his friend Barney
from the pirates—to the hermit’s cottage in the lonely
valley, where he first made acquaintance with monkeys,
iguanas, jaguars, armadillos, and all the wonderful,
beautiful, and curious birds, beasts, and reptiles, plants,
trees, and flowers, that live and flourish in that
romantic country. Once more, in fancy, he was sail-
ing up the mighty Amazon, shooting alligators on its
banks, spearing fish in its waters, paddling through
its curious Gapo, and swinging in his hammock under
its luxuriant forests. Once again he was a prisoner
among the wild Indians, and he started convulsively
as he thought of the terrible leap over the precipice
into the stream that flowed into the heart of the earth.
Then he wandered in the lonely forest. Suddenly
the diamond mines were before him, and Barney’s
jovial voice rang in his ears, and he replied to it with
energy, for now he was bounding on a fiery steed over
the grassy campos. With a deep sigh he awoke from
his reverie to find himself surrounded by the great
wide sea,
CHAPTER XXVIL
The return.
RTHUR JOLLYBOY, Esquire, of the Old
Hulk, sat on the top of a tall three-legged
stool in his own snug little office in the sea-port
town of Bilton, with his legs swinging to and fro ;
his socks displayed a considerable way above the
tops of his gaiters; his hands thrust deep into his
breeches pockets; his spectacles high on his bald
forehead, and his eyes looking through the open
letter that lay before him—through the desk under-
neath it—through the plank floor, cellars, and foun-
dations of the edifice—and through the entire world
into the distant future beyond.
“Four thousand pair of socks,’ he murmured,
pulling down his spectacles and consulting the open
letter for the tenth time; “four thousand pair of
socks, with the hitch, same as last bale, but a very
little coarser in material.â€
“Four thousand pair! and who's to make them, 1
MARTIN RATTLER. QU7
wonder? If poor Mrs. Dorothy Grumbit were here
—ah! well, she’s gone, so it can’t be helped. Four
thousand !—dear me, who will make them? Do
you know ?â€
This question was addressed to his youngest clerk,
who sat on the opposite side of the desk staring at
Mr. Jollyboy with that open impudence of expression
peculiar to young puppy-dogs whose masters are un-
usually indulgent.
“No, sir, I don’t,†said the clerk with a broad
grin.
Before the perplexed merchant could come at any
conclusion on this knotty subject, the door opened,
and Martin Rattler entered the room, followed by his
friend Barney O’Flannagan.
“You've come to the wrong room, friends,†said
Mr. Jollyboy with a benignant smile. “ My princi-
pal clerk engages men and pays wages. His office
is just opposite ; first door in the passage.â€
“We don’t want to engage,†said Martin; “we
wish to speak with you, six.â€
“Oh, beg pardon!†cried Mr. Jollyboy, leaping off
the stool with surprising agility for a man of his
years. “Come in this way. Pray be seated. Eh!
ah! surely [ve seen you before, my good fellow ?â€
“Vis, sir, that ye have. I’ve sailed aboard your
278 MARTIN RATTLER.
ships many a time. My name’s Barney O’Flannagan,
at yer sarvice.â€
“Ah! I recollect; and a good man you are, I’ve
been told, Barney. But I have lost sight of you for
some years. Been on a long voyage, I suppose ?â€
“ Well, not ’xactly ; but I’ve been on a long cruise,
an’ no mistake, in the woods o’ Brazil. I wos wrecked
on the coast there, in the Firefly.â€
“Ah! to be sure. Iremember, And your young
messmate here, was he with you ?â€
« Yes, sir, I was,†said Martin, answering for him-
self; “and I had once the pleasure of your acquaint-
ance. Perhaps if you look steadily in my face you
may—â€
“Ah, then! don’t try to bamboozle him. He
might as well look at a bit o’ mahogany as at your
faygur-head. Tell him at wance, Martin, dear.â€
“ Martin ?†exclaimed the puzzled old gentleman,
seizing the young sailor by the shoulders and gazing
intently into his face. “Martin! Martin! Surely
not—yes! eh? Martin Rattler ?â€
“ Ay, that am I, dear Mr. Jollyboy, safe and sound,
and—~â€
Martin’s speech was cut short in consequence of
his being violently throttled by Mr. Jollyboy, who
flung his arms round his neck and staggered reck-
MARTIN RATTLER. 279
lessly about the office with him! This was the great
point which Barney had expected—it was the climax
to which he had been looking forward all the morn-
ing; and it did not come short of his anticipations,
for Mr. Jollyboy danced round Martin and embraced
him for at least ten minutes, asking him at the same
time a shower of questions, which he gave him no
time to answer. In the excess of his delight, Barney
smote his thigh with his broad hand so forcibly that
it burst upon the startled clerk like a pistol-shot,
and caused him to spring off his stool!
“Don’t be afear’d, young un,†said Barney, wink-
ing and poking the small clerk jocosely in the ribs
with his thumb. “Isn't it beautiful to see them ?
Arrah, now! isn’t it purty ?â€
“Keep your thumbs to yourself, you sea-monster,â€
said the small clerk angrily, and laying his hand on the
ruler. But Barney minded him not, and continued
to smite his thigh and rub his hands, while he per-
formed a sort of gigantic war-dance round Mr. Jolly-
boy and Martin.
In a few minutes the old gentleman subsided suffi-
ciently to understand questions.
“But my aunt,†said Martin anxiously; “you
have said nothing about Aunt Dorothy. How is
she ? where is she? is she well 2â€
280 MARTIN RATTLER.
To these questions Mr. Jollyboy returned no
answer, but sitting suddenly down on a chair, he
covered his face with his hands.
“She is not ill?†inquired Martin in a husky
voice, while his heart beat violently. “Speak, Mr.
Jollyboy, is she—is she—â€
“No, she’s not ill,†returned the old gentleman
“ but she’s—â€
“She is dead!†said Martin, in a tone so deep and
sorrowful that the old gentleman started up,
“No, no, not dead, my dear boy; I did not mean
that. Forgive my stupidity, Martin. Aunt Dorothy
is gone—left the village a year ago; and I have
never seen or heard of her since.â€
Terrible though this news was, Martin felt a slight
degree of relief to know that she was not dead—
at least there was reason to hope that she might be
still alive.
“ But when did she go? and why? and where ?â€
“She went about twelve months ago,†replied Mr.
Jollyboy. “ You see, Martin, after she lost you she
seemed to lose all hope and all spirit; and at last she
gave up making socks for me, and did little but
moan in her seat in the window and look out towards
the sea. So I got a pleasant young girl to take
care of her; and she did not want for any of the
MARTIN RATTLER. 281
comforts of life. One day the little girl came to me
here, having run all the way from the village, to say
that Mrs. Grumbit had packed up a bundle of clothes
and gone off to Liverpool by the coach. She took
the opportunity of the girl’s absence on some errand
to escape, and we should never have known it had
not some boys of the village seen her get into the
coach and tell the guard that she was going to make
inquiries after Martin. I instantly set out for Liver-
pool; but long before I arrived the coach had dis-
charged its passengers, and the coachman, not sus-
pecting that anything was wrong, had taken no
notice of her after arriving. From that day to this
I have not ceased to advertise and make all possible
inquiries, but without success.â€
Martin heard the narrative in silence, and when it
was finished he sat a few minutes gazing vacantly
before him, like one in a dream. Then starting up .
suddenly, he wrung Mr. Jollyboy’s hand. “ Good-
bye, my dear friend, good-bye. I shall go to Liver-
pool. We shall meet again.â€
“ Stay, Martin, stay—’
But Martin had rushed from the room, followed
by his faithful friend, and in less than half-an-hour
they were in the village of Ashford. The coach was
to pass in twenty minutes, so bidding Barney engage
282 MARTIN RATTLER.
two outside seats, Martin hastened round by the road
towards the cottage. There it stood, quaint, time-
worn, and old-fashioned, as when he had last seen it
—the little garden in which he had so often played
—the bower in which, on fine weather, Aunt Dorothy
used to sit, and the door-step on which the white
kitten used to gambol. But the shutters were closed
and the door was locked, and there was an air of
desolation and a deep silence brooding over the place
that sank more poignantly into Martin’s heart than
if he had come and found every vestige of the home
of his childhood swept away. It was like the body
without the soul. The flowers and stones and well-
known forms were there; but she who had given
animation to the whole was gone. Sitting down on
the door-step, Martin buried his face in his hands
and wept.
He was quickly aroused by the bugle of the ap-
proaching coach. Springing up, he dashed the tears
away and hurried towards the high-road. In a few
minutes Barney and he were seated on the top of
the coach, and dashing, at the rate of ten miles an
hour, along the road to Liverpool.
CHAPTER XXVIL.
The old garret.
ps and weeks and months passed away, and
Martin had searched every nook and corner
of the great sea-port without discovering his old
aunt, or obtaining the slightest information regarding
her. At first he and Barney went about the search
together, but after a time he sent his old companion
forcibly away to visit his own relatives, who dwelt
not far from Bilton, at the same time promising that
if he had any good news to tell he would immediately
write and let him know.
One morning, as Martin was . sitting beside the
little fire in his lodging, a tap came to the door, and
the servant girl told him that a policeman wished to
see him.
“Show him in,†said Martin, who was not in the
least surprised, for he had had much intercourse
with these guardians of the public peace during the
course of his unavailing search.
284 MARTIN RATTLER.
“T think, sir,†said the man on entering, “ that
we've got scent of an old woman w’ich is as like the
one that you're arter as hanythink.â€
Martin rose in haste. “Have you, my man? Are
you sure ?â€
“Bout as sure as a man can be who never seed her.
But it won't take you long to walk. Youd better
come and see for yourself.â€
Without uttering another word, Martin put on his
hat and followed the policeman. They passed through
several streets and lanes, and at length came to one
of the poorest districts of the city, not far distant
from the shipping. Turning down a narrow alley,
and crossing a low, dirty-looking court, Martin’s guide
stopped before a door, which he pushed open, and
mounted by a flight of rickety wooden stairs to a
garret. He opened the door and entered.
“There she is,†said the man in a tone of pity, as
he pointed to a corner of the apartment; “an’ Pm
afear’d she’s goin’ fast.â€
Martin stepped towards a low truckle-bed on which
lay the emaciated form of a woman covered with a
scanty and ragged quilt. The corner of it was drawn
across her face, and so gentle was her breathing that
it seemed as if she were already dead. Martin re-
moved the covering, and one clance at that gentle,
MARTIN RATTLER. 285
careworn countenance sufficed to convince him that
his old aunt lay before him. His first impulse was
to seize her in his strong arms, but another look at
the frail and attenuated form caused him to shrink
back in fear.
“Leave me,†he said, rising hastily and slipping
half a sovereign into the policeman’s hand; “ this is
she. I wish to be alone with her.â€
The man touched his hat and retired, closing the
door behind him; while Martin, sitting down on the
bed, took one of his aunt’s thin hands in his. The
action was tenderly performed, but it awoke her.
For the first time it flashed across Martin’s mind that
the sudden joy of seeing him might be too much for
one so feeble as Aunt Dorothy seemed to be. He
turned his back hastily to the light, and with a
violent effort suppressed his feelings while he asked
how she did.
“ Well, very well,†said Aunt Dorothy, in a faint
voice. “Are you the missionary that was here lone
ago? Qh! I’ve been longing for you. Why did
you not come to read to me oftener about Jesus?
But I have had him here although you did not
come. He has been saying, ‘Come unto me, ye that
labour and are heavy laden, and I will give you rest.’
Yes, I have found rest in him.†She ceased and
286 MARTIN RATTLER.
seemed to fall asleep again; but in a few seconds she
opened her eyes and said, “ Martin, too, has been to
see me; but he does not come so often now. The
darling boy used always to come to me in my dreams.
But he never brings me food. Why does no one ever
bring me food? I am hungry.â€
“Should you like food now, if I brought it to
you?†said Martin in a low voice.
«Yes, yes, bring me food; I am dying.â€
Martin released her hand and glided gently out of
the room. In a few minutes he returned with a can
of warm soup and a roll, of which Aunt Dorothy
partook with an avidity that showed she had been in
urgent need. Immediately after she went to sleep,
and Martin sat upon the bed holding her hand in
both of his till she awoke, which she did in an hour
after, and again ate a little food. While she was
thus engaged the door opened and a young man
entered, who stated that he was a doctor, and had
been sent there by a policeman.
_“ There is no hope,†he said in a whisper, after
feeling her pulse ; “ the system is quite exhausted.â€
“ Doctor? whispered Martin, seizing the young man
by the arm, “can nothing save her? I have money,
and can command anything that may do her good.â€
‘The doctor shook his head. “ You may give her a
MARTIN RATTLER. 287
little wine. It will strengthen her for a time, but I
fear there is no hope. I will send in a bottle if you
wish it.â€
Martin gave him the requisite sum, and in a few
minutes the wine was brought up by a boy.
The effect of the wine was wonderful. Aunt
Dorothy’s eyes sparkled as they used to do in days
of old, and she spoke with unwonted energy.
“You are kind to me, young man,†she said, look-
ing earnestly into Martin’s face, which, however, he
kept carefully in shadow. “May our Lord reward
you!â€
“Would you like me to talk to you of your
nephew?†said Martin. “I have seen him abroad.â€
“Seen my boy! Is he not dead?â€
“No; he is alive, and in this country, too.â€
Aunt Dorothy turned pale, but did not reply for a
few minutes, during which she grasped his hand con-
vulsively.
“Turn your face to the light,†she said faintly.
Martin obeyed, and bending over her whispered,
“He is here; I am Martin, my dear, dear aunt—â€
No expression of surprise escaped from Aunt
Dorothy as she folded her arms round his neck and
pressed his head upon her bosom. His hot tears fell
upon her neck while she held him, but she spoke not.
288 MARTIN RATTLER.
It was evident that as the strength infused by the
wine abated her faculties became confused. At length
she whispered,—
“It is good of you to come to see me, darling
boy. You have often come to me in my dreams.
But do not leave me so soon; stay a very little
longer.â€
« This is no dream, dearest aunt,†whispered Martin,
while his tears flowed faster ; “I am really here.â€
“ Ay, so you always say, my darling child; but
you always go away and leave me. This is a dream,
no doubt, like all the rest; but oh, it seems very,
very real! You never wept before, although you often
smiled. Surely this is the best and brightest dream
I ever had!â€
Continuing to murmur his name while she clasped
him tightly to her bosom, Aunt Dorothy gently fell
asleep.
CHAPTER XXVIII.
Conclusion.
UNT DOROTHY GRUMBIT did not die. Her
gentle spirit had nearly fled; but Martin’s re-
turn and Martin’s tender nursing brought her round,
and she gradually regained all her former strength
and vigour. Yes, to the unutterable joy of Martin,
to the inexpressible delight of Mr. Arthur Jollyboy
and Barney, and to the surprise and complete discom-
fiture of the young doctor, who shook his head and
said, “There is no hope,†Aunt Dorothy Grumbit re-
covered, and was brought back in health and in
triumph to her old cottage at Ashford !
Moreover, she was arrayed again in the old bed-
curtain chintz with the flowers as big as saucers, and
the old high-crowned cap. A white kitten was got,
too, so like the one that used to be Martin’s play-
mate, that no one could discover a hair of difference.
So remarkable was this, that Martin made inquiry,
19
290 MARTIN RATTLER.
and found that it was actually the grand-daughter of
the old kitten, which was still alive and well; so he
brought it back too, and formally installed it in the
cottage along with its grandchild.
There was a great house-warming on the night of
the day in which Aunt Dorothy Grumbit was brought
back. Myr. Arthur Jollyboy was there—of course ;
and the vicar was there; and the pursy doctor who
used to call Martin “a scamp ;†and the schoolmaster ;
and last, though not least, Barney O’Flannagan was
there. And they all had tea, during which dear
Aunt Dorothy smiled sweetly on everybody and said
nothing—and, indeed, did nothing, except that once
or twice she put additional sugar and cream into
Martin’s cup when he was not looking, and stroked
one of his hands continually. After tea Martin re-
lated his adventures in Brazil, and Barney helped
him; and these two talked more that night than any
one could have believed it possible for human beings
to do, without the aid of steam lungs! And the
doctor listened, and the vicar and schoolmaster ques-
tioned, and old Mr. Jollyboy roared and laughed till
he became purple in the face—particularly at the
sallies of Barney. As for old Aunt Dorothy Grumbit,
she listened when Martin spoke. When Martin was
silent she became stone deaf !
MARTIN RATTLER. 291
In the course of time Mr. Jollyboy made Martin
his head clerk; and then, becoming impatient, he
made him his partner off-hand. Then he made
Barney O’Flannagan an overseer in the warehouses;
and when the duties of the day were over, the versa-
tile Ivishman became his confidential servant, and
went to sup and sleep at the Old Hulk; which, he
used to remark, was quite a natural and proper
and decidedly comfortable place to come to an an-
chor in.
Martin became the stay and comfort of his aunt in
her old age, and the joy which he was the means of
giving to her heart was like a deep and placid river
which never ceases to flow. Ah! there is a rich
blessing in store for those who tenderly nurse and
comfort the aged, when called upon to do so; and
assuredly there is a sharp thorn prepared for those
who neglect this sacred duty. Martin read the Bible
to her night and morning; and she did nothing but
watch for him at the window while he was out. As
Martin afterwards became an active member of the
benevolent societies with which his partner was con-
nected, he learned from sweet experience that “it is
more blessed to give than to receive,†and that “it is
better to go to the house of mourning than to go to
the house of feasting.â€
292 MARTIN RATTLER.
Dear young reader, do not imagine that we plead
in favour of moroseness or gloom. Laugh if you
will, and feast if you will, and remember, too, that
“a merry heart is a continual feast;†but we pray
you not to forget that God himself has said that a
visit to the house of mourning is better than a visit
to the house of feasting. And strange to say, it is
productive of greater joy; for to do good is better
than to get good, as surely as sympathy is better than
selfishness.
Martin visited the poor and read the Bible to them ;
and in watering others he was himself watered, for
he found the “Pearl of Great Price,†even Jesus
Christ, the Saviour of the world.
Business prospered in the hands of Martin Rattler,
too, and he became a man of substance. Naturally,
too, he became a man of great importance in the
town of Bilton. The quantity of work that Martin
and Mr. Jollyboy and Barney used to get through
was quite marvellous, and the number of engage-
ments they had during the course of a day was quite
bewildering.
In the existence of all men, who are not born to
unmitigated misery, there are times and seasons of
peculiar enjoyment. The happiest hour of all the
twenty-four to Martin Rattler was the hour of seven
MARTIN RATTLER. 293
in the evening; for then it was that he found him-
self seated before the blazing fire in the parlour of the
Old Hulk, to which Aunt Dorothy Grumbit had con-
sented to’ be removed, and in which she was now a
fixture. Then it was that old Mr. Jollyboy beamed
with benevolence, until the old lady sometimes thought
the fire was going to melt him; then it was that the
tea-kettle sang on the hob like a canary; and then
it was that Barney bustled about the room preparing
the evening meal, and talking all the time with the
most perfect freedom to any one who chose to listen
to him. Yes, seven p.m. was Martin’s great hour,
and Aunt Dorothy’s great hour, and old Mr. Jolly-
boy’s great hour, and Barney’s too; for each knew
that the labours of the day were done, and that the
front door was locked for the night, and that a great
talk was brewing.
They had a tremendous talk every night, some-
times on one subject, sometimes on another; but
the subject of all others that they talked oftenest
about was their travels. And many a time and
oft, when the winter storms howled round the Old
Hulk, Barney was invited to draw in his chair, and
Martin and he plunged again vigorously into the
great old forests of South America, and spoke so
feelingly about them that Aunt Dorothy and Mr.
294, MARTIN RATTLER.
Jollyboy almost fancied themselves transported into
the midst of tropical scenes, and felt as if they were
surrounded by parrots, and monkeys, and jaguars,
and alligators, and anacondas, and all the wonderful
birds, beasts, reptiles, and fishes that inhabit the
woods and waters of Brazil.
THE END.
Library of Historical Tales.
Dorothy Arden. A Story of Eng-
land and France Two Hundred
YearsAgo. By J. M. Caniwet.
Crown 8vo, cloth extra. Price 4s.
A story of the dragonnades in France
in the time of Louis XIV. Also of the
persecutions in England under James IT.,
the Monmouth rebellion, the Bloody
Assize, and the Revolution.
How they Kept the Faith. A Tale
of the Huguenots of Languedoc.
By Grace Raymonp. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 4s.
“No finer, more touchingly realistic,
and truthfully accurate picture of the
Languedoc Huguenots have we met.â€â€”
ABERDEEN FREE PREss.
The Lost Ring. A Romance of
Scottish History in the Days of
King James and Andrew Mel-
ville. Crown 8vo, cloth extra. 4s.
“The plot of the romance is skilfully
constructed, the dialogue is admirable,
and the principal actors in the history
are portrayed with great ability.â€â€”U.P.
MisstonaRy REcorD.
The City and the Castle A
Story of the Reformation in
Switzerland. By Annin Lucas,
Author of ‘‘ Leonie,†etc. Crown
8vo, cloth extra. Price 4s.
Faithfully portrays the state and char-
acter of society at the time of the Refor-
mation (in Switzerland).
Leonie ; or, Light out of Darkness :
and Within Iron Walls, a Tale
of the Siege of Paris. Twin-
Stories of the Franco - German
War. By Anniz Lucas. Crown
8vo, cloth extra. Price 4s.
Two tales, the first connected with the
second. One, of country life in France
during the war; the other, life within
the besieged capital.
Under the Southern Cross. A
Tale of the New World. By the
Author of ‘The Spanish Broth-
ers,†etc. Crown 8vo, cl. ex. 4s.
A thrilling and fascinating story.
Alison Walsh. A Study of To-
Day. By Constance EVveELyy.
Crown 8vo, cloth extra. Price 4s.
La Rochelle; or, The Refugees.
A Story of the Huguenots. By
Mrs. E. C. Witson. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 4s.
Wenzel’s Inheritance; or, Faith-
ful unto Death. A Tale of Bohe-
mia in the Fifteenth Century.
By Annie Lucas. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 4s.
Presents a vivid picture of the religi-
ous and social condition of Bohemia in
the fifteenth century.
Helena’s Household. A Tale of
Rome in the First Century.
With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 4s.
The Spanish Brothers. A Tale
of the Sixteenth Century. By
the Author of ‘‘ The Dark Year
of Dundee.†Crown 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 4s.
The Czar.
the First Napoleon. By the Au-
thor of ‘‘ The Spanish Brothers,â€
ete. Crown 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 4s.
An interesting tale of the great Franco-
Russian war in 1812-18 ; the characters
partly French, partly Russian.
Arthur Erskine’s Story. A Tale
of the Days of Knox. By the
Author of ‘‘The Spanish Broth-
ers,†ete. Crown 8vo, cloth ex-
tra. Price 4s.
The object of the writer of this tale is
to portray the life of the people im the
days of Knox.
Pendower. A Story of Cornwall
in the Reign of Henry the Highth.
By M. Firtzvn. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 4s.
A tale illustrating in fiction that stir-
ring period of English history previous
to the Reformation.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
W. H. G. Kingston’s Books for Boys.
In the Eastern Seas; or, The
Regions of the Bird of Paradise.
A Tale for Boys. With 111
Iustrations. Crown 8vo, gilt
edges. Price ds.
A tale of voyage and adventure among
the islands of the Malay Archipelago,
with descriptions of scenery and objects
of natural history.
In the Wilds of Africa. With
upwards of 70 Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
An interesting account of adventures
by a shipwrecked party who are landed
on the west coast of Africa, and make
their way to the south through many
dangers.
On the Banks of the Amazon; or,
A Boy’s Journal of his Adventures
in the Tropical Wilds of South
America. Profusely Illustrated.
Crown 8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
In the course of the narrative some of
the numberless animals, as well as a few
of the most interesting of the vegetable
productions, of the Amazonian Valley
are described.
Saved from the Sea; or, The Loss
of the Viper, and the Adventures
of her Crew in the Great Sahara.
With 30 Full-page Engravings.
Crown 8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
A young sailor's account of his own
adventures, along with three shipwrecked
comrades.
The South Sea Whaler. A Story
of the Loss of the Champion, and
the Adventures of her Crew.
With upwards of 30 Engravings.
Crown 8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
A tale of mutiny and shipwreck in the
South Seas, the captain having his son
and daughter on board with him.
In the Wilds of Florida.
37 Engravings.
edges. Price 5s.
A tale of warfare and hunting.
With
Crown 8vo, gilt
Twice Lost. With 36 Engrav.
ings. Crown 8vo, gilt edges. 5s.
A young sailor's story of shipwreck,
and perilous adventures in the wilds of
Australia.
A Voyage Round the World.
A Tale for Boys. With 42 En-
gravings. Crown 8vo, gilt edges,
Price 5s.
A young sailor's account of his own
adventures by sea and land, the scenes
being laid chiefly in South America, the
South Sea Islands, and Japan,
Old Jack.
66 Engravings.
edges. Price 5s.
An old sailor's account of his own ad-
ventures, during times of peace and of
war, in many parts of the world.
The Wanderers; or, Adventures
in the Wilds of Trinidad and up
the Orinoco, With 30 Full-page
Engravings. Crown 8vo, gilt
edges. Price 5s.
A Pennsylvanian merchant sets out
with his family to South America, and
meets with many adventures by sea and
land, which are related by his son.
The Young Lianero. A Story of
War and Wild Life in Venezuela.
With 44 Engravings. Crown
8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
A thrilling and fascinating narrative
of adventures in South America,
The Young Rajah. A Story of
Indian Life and Adventure. With
upwards of 40 Full-page Engrav-
ings. Crown 8vo, gilt edges. 5s.
A story of the Indian Mutiny; the
hero @ young Indian prince, who had
received an English education and be-
come a Christian.
My First Voyage to Southern
Seas. With 52 Engravings.
Crown 8vo, gilt edges. Price 5s.
A young sailor's story, describing Cape
With
Crown 8vo, gilt
Colony, Ceylon, Aden, ete.
* * Also to be had in uniform cloth binding as ‘‘ The Kingston
â€
Library for Boys.
Price 4s. per volume.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
Our Boys’ Select Library,
Stories of Adventure, Travel, and Discovery.
Post 8vo, cloth extra, uniform binding. Price 2s. 6d. each.
Beyond the Himalayas. A Book
for Boys. By Joun Gerppre,
F.R.G.8., Author of ‘The Lake
Regions of Central Africa,†etc.
With 9 Engravings.
The Castaways. A Story of Ad-
venture in the Wilds of Borneo.
By Captain Mayne Rei.
Frank Redcliffe. A Story of Tra-
vel and Adventure in the Forests
of Venezuela. A Book for Boys.
By Acuittes Davunr, Author of
“The Three Trappers,†etc.
With numerous Illustrations.
In the Land of the Moose, the
Bear, and the Beaver. Adven-
tures in the Forests of the Atha-
basca. By Acuittes Davunt,
Author of ‘‘The Three Trappers.â€
With Illustrations.
In the Bush and on the Trail.
Adventures in the Forests of
North America. A Book for
Boys. By M. Benzpicr Revort.
With 70 Illustrations.
The Lake Regions of Central
Africa. A Record of Modern
Discovery. By Joun Gepprs,
F.R.G.S. With 32 Illustrations.
Lost in the Backwoods. A Tale
of the Canadian Forest. By Mrs.
TRAILL, Author of “In the For-
est,†ete. With 32 Engravings.
The Meadows Family; or, Fire-
side Stories of Adventure and
Enterprise. By M. A. Pavt,
Author of ‘‘ Tim’s Troubles,†ete.
With IMlustrations,
The Three Trappers. A Book for
Boys. By Acwittzs Daunt,
Author of “In the Land of the
Moose, the Bear, and the Beaver.â€
With 11 Engravings,
Wrecked on a Reef ; or, Twenty
Months in the Auckland Isles.
A True Story of Shipwreck, Ad-
venture, and Suffering. With 40
Illustrations.
Ralph’s Year in Russia. A Story
of Travel and Adventure in East-
ern Europe. By Rozerr Ricu-
ARDsoN, Author of “ Almost a
Hero,†ete. With 8 Engrav-
ings.
Scenes with the Hunter and the
Trapper in Many Lands. Stories
of Adventures with Wild Ani-
mals. With Engravings.
The Forest, the Jungle, and the
Prairie; or, Tales of Adventure
and Enterprise in Pursuit of Wild
Animals. With numerous En-
gravings.
The Island Home; or, The Young
Castaways.
ture in the Southern Seas. With
Illustrations.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
Travel and Adventure.
Jack Hooper.
Sea and in South Africa.
Author of ‘ Across Africa,†etc.
With 23 Full-page Illustrations.
Price 4s., or with gilt edges, 5s.
“Our author has the immense advan-
tage over many writers of bays’ stories
that he describes what he has seen, and.
does not merely draw on his imagination
and on books.†—ScorsMAN.
With Pack and Rifle in the Far
South-West. Adventures in
New Mexico, Arizona, and
Central America. By ACHILLES
Davunt, Author of ‘‘ Frank Red-
cliffe,†ete. With 30 Illustra-
tions. 4s., or with gilt edges, 5s.
A delightful book of travel and adven-
ture, with much valuable information as
to the geography and natural history of
the wild American “ Far West.â€
In Savage Africa; or, The Ad-
ventures of Frank Baldwin from
the Gold Coast to Zanzibar. By
Verney Loverr Cameron, C.B.,
D.C.L., Commander Royal Navy ;
Author of ‘Jack Hooper,†etc.
With 32 Illustrations. _ Crown
8vo, cloth extra, gilt edges. Price
4s., or with gilt edges, 5s.
Early English Voyagers ; or, The
Adventures and Discoverics of
Drake, Cavendish, and Dampier.
Numerous Illustrations. Price
4s., or with gilt edges, ds.
The title of this work describes the con-
tents. It is a handsome volume, which
will be a valuable gift for young persons
generally, and boys in particular. There
are included many interesting tlustra-
tions and portraits of the three great
eouagers.
Sandford and Merton.
for the Young. By Tuomas Day.
Illustrated.
tra. Price 2s. 6d.
——_——+
His Adventures at
By
Verney Lovert Cameron, C.B.,
D.C.L., Commander Royal Navy;
A Book
Post Svo, cloth ex-
hy
Robinson Crusoe.
Our Sea-Coast Heroes; or, Tales
of Wreck and of Rescue by the
Lifeboat and Rocket. By AcurL-
tes Daun, Author of ‘‘ Frank
Redcliffe,†etc. With numerous
Illustrations. Price 2s, 6d.
The Life and
Strange Adventures of Robinson
Crusoe, of York, Mariner. Wruit-
ten by Himself. Carefully Re-
printed from the Original dition.
With Memoir of De Foe, a Me-
moir of Alexander Selkirk, and
other interesting additions. II-
lustrated with upwards of Seventy
Engravings by Kenney Hats-
WELLE. Crown 8vo, cloth ex. 3s.
An edition that every boy would be
pleased to include in his library. It is
handsomely bound, and the numerous
illustrations assist greatly in the reatiza-
tion of this famous story.
The Swiss Family Robinson ; or,
Adventures of a Father and his
Four Sons on a Desolate Island.
Unabridged Translation. With
300 Illustrations. Price 3s.
A capital edition of this well-known
work. As the title suggests, its character
is somewhat similar to that of the famous
“Robinson Crusoe.†It combines, in a
high degree, the tivo desirable qualities in
a book,—instruction and amusement.
Gulliver's Travels into Several
Remote Regions of the World.
With Introduction and Explana-
tory Notes by the late Mr. Rozert
Mackxernzin, Author of “The 19th
Century,†*‘ America,†ete. With
20 Illustrations. Post Svo, cloth
extra. Price 3s.
A very handsome edition, wader the
editorship of Mr. Robert Machenzie, who
has supplied for it a well-written intro-
duction and explanatory notes....We
have also here the curious original maps
and a aumber of modern illustrations
of much merit. Altogether this is a most
attractive reappearance of a famous
book.’—GLAsGoW ITBRALD.
', NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORE.
Famous Artists.
General Grant’s Life,
Earnest Men:
Self-Effort Series.
The Achievements of Youth. By
the Rev. Rogert Steen, D.D!,
Ph.D., Author of “Lives Made
Sublime,†‘‘ Doing Good,†ete.
Post 8vo, cloth extra. Price
3s. 6d.
Michael Angelo
—Leonardo da Vinci—Raphael—
Titian—Murillo—Rubens—Rem-
brandt. By Saran K. Botton.
Post Svo, cloth extra. 3s. 6d.
Interesting biographies of Michael An-
gelo, Da Vinci, Raphael, Titian, Murillo,
Rubens, and Rembrandt. The book also
contains critical and other notices by
Vasari, Passwvant, Taine, Crowe and
Cavalcaselle, etc., which are both interest-
ing and instructive.
Doing Good; or, The Christian in
Walks of Usefulness. IRllustrated
by Examples. By the Rev. R.
Sreut, D.D. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 3s. 6d.
A series of short biographical sketches
of Christians remarkable for various
kinds of usefulness, for example and en-
couragement to others.
(From the
Tannery to the White House.)
Story of the Life of Ulysses S.
Grant: his Boyhood, Youth,
Manhood, Public and Private
Life and Services. By Wrintam
M. Tuayver, Author of ‘* From
Log Cabin to White House,â€
etc. With Portrait, Vignette,
etc. Reprinted complete from
the American Hdition. 400
pages. Crown 8vo, cloth extra,
gilt side and edges. Price 8s. 6d.
Cheaper Hidition, 2s. 6d.
Their Life and
Work. By the late Rev. W. K.
Tweepiz, D.D. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 3s. 6d.
Contains biographical sketches of emi-
nent patriots, heroes for the truth, philan-
thropists, and men of science.
T. NELSON AND SONS,
The Young Huguenots; or, The
Soldiers of the Cross. A Story
of the Seventeenth Century. By
‘Fier DE Lys.†With Six IL
lustrations. Post 8vo, cloth ex-
tra. Price 3s. 6d.
Heroes of the Desert. The Story
of the Lives of Moffat and Living-
stone. By the Author of “Mary
Powell.†New and Enlarged
Edition, with numerous Illustra-
tions and two Portraits. Post
8vo, cloth extra. Price 3s. 6d.
In this handsome new edition the story
of Dr. Moffat is completed ; a sketch being
given of the principal incidents in the
last twenty years of his life.
Lives Made Sublime by Faith
and Works. By the Rev. R.
Stege., D.D., Author of ‘‘ Doing
Good,†etc. Post 8vo, cloth ex-
tra. Price 3s. 6d.
A volume of short biographical sketches
of Christian men, eminent and useful in
various walks of life,—as Hugh Miller,
Sir Henry Havelock, Robert Flockhart, ete,
Noble Women of Our Time. By
JosepH Jounson, Author of
‘Living in Earnest,†etc. With
Accounts of the Work of Misses
De Broén, Whately, Carpenter,
Fr. R. Havergal, Macpherson,
Sister Dora, etc. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 3s. 6d.
A handsome volume, containing short
biographies of many Christian women,
whose lives have been devoted to mission-
ary and philanthropic work — Sister
Dora, Mrs. Tait, Frances Havergal, ete.
Self-Effort ; or, The True Method
of Attaining Success in Life. By
Josrpe Jounson, Author of ‘“Liv-
ing in Earnest,†etc. Post 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 3s. 6d.
Lhis book of example and encourage-
ment has been written to induce carnest-
ness in life, the illustrations being drawn
from recent books of biography.
LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK,
Works on Nature and Natural History.
Chips from the Earth’s Crust;
or, Short Studies in Natural
Science. By Joun Greson, Natu-
ral History Department, Edin-
burgh Museum of Science and
Art; Author of ‘Science Glean-
ings in Many Fields,†etc. With
99 Tilustrations. Post Svo, cloth
extra. Price 2s. 6d.
“ 4 popular account of the Earth's sur-
face and formation, such as may interest
and instruct boys of an inquiring habit
of mind. It comprises chapters on earth-
quakes, meteors, tornadoes, and other
phenomend.â€â€”SsTURDAY REVIEW.
Science Gleanings in Animal Life.
By Jouy Gipson, Natural History
Department, Edinburgh Museum
of Scienceand Art. With 18 Illus-
trations. Post Svo, cloth extra.
Price 2s. 6d.
The reader will find “Science Glean-
ings†rich in information regarding such
interesting topics as animal intelligence,
animal mimicry, the weapons of animals,
their partnerships, and their migrations.
Much information is also given regard-
ing food fishes and about animals with
which, whether as friends or foes, mon
has more especially to do.
Great Waterfalls, Cataracts, and
Geysers. Described and_Ilus-
trated. By Jonny Gipson, Natural
History Department, Edinburgh
Museum of Science and Art; Au-
thor of ‘‘ Chips from the Earth’s
Crust,†ete. With 32 Hlustra-
tions. Post S8vo, cloth extra.
Price 2s. 6d.
Earthquakes: Their History, Phe-
nomena, and Probable Causes.
By Munco Poston, F.R.S.E.
New and Revised Edition, with
an Account of Recent Karth-
quakes, by the Author of ‘‘ Chips
from the Earth’s Crust,†ete.
Post 8vo, cloth extra. 2s.
In the Tropical Regions ;
In the Polar Regions ; or, Nature
and Natural History in the Frozen
Zones. With Anecdotes and
Stories of Adventure and Travel.
46 Illustrations. Post Svo, cloth
extra. Price 2s, 6d.
or,
Nature and Natural History in
the Torrid Zone. With Anec-
dotes and Stories of Adventure
and Travel. 78 Illustrations.
Post 8vo, cloth extra. 2s, 6d.
In the Temperate Regions; or,
Nature and Natural History in
the Temperate Zones. With
Anecdotes and Stories of Adven-
tureand Travel. 72 Illustrations.
Post Svo, cloth extra. 2s. 6d.
“Tn the Polar,†“In the Tropical,â€
and “In the Temperate Regions,†are
three companion volumes, though each is
complete in itself. The full title suggests
the character of the books. They are re-
plete with information on the animal and
vegetable Life of the cowntrics described,
and abound in illustrations in elucida-
tion of the text. Good books etther for
school or home libraries.
Gaugsen’s World’s Birthday. II
lustrated. Foolscap 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Lectures delivered to an audience of
young people, in Geneva, on the Sirst
chapter of Genesis. The discoveries of
astronomical and geological science are
simply explained, and, harmonized with
the statements of Scripture.
Nature’s Wonders ; or, How God’s
Works Praise Him. By the Rev.
Ricnarp Newton, D.D. With
53 Engravings. Post Svo. 2s. 6a
Addresses to young persons, on various
subjects of science and natural history,
to show “how God's works praise him.â€
With illustrative anecdotes and engrav-
ings.
T, NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
Prize Temperance Tales.
ONE HUNDRED POUND PRIZE TALE.
Frank Oldfield; or, Lost and
Found. By the Rev. T. P. Wiz-
son, M.A. With Five Engrav-
ings. Post 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 3s. 6d.
An interesting prize temperance tale ;
the scene partly in Lancashire, partly in
Australia.
ONE HUNDRED POUND PRIZE TALE.
Sought and Saved. By M. A.
Pauut, Author of ‘“‘Tim’s Trou-
bles ; or, Tried and True.†With
Six Engravings. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 3s. 6d.
A prize temperance tale for the young.
With illustrative engravings.
ONE HUNDRED POUND PRIZE TALE,
Through Storm to Sunshine. By
Wittram J. Lacry, Author of
“A Life’s Motto,†“The Captain’s
Plot,†etc. With Illustrations.
Post Svo, cloth extra. 3s. 6d.
This interesting tale was selected by the
Band of Hope Union last year, from
among thirty-seven others, as worthy of
the £100 prize. It now forms a beautiful
volume, with sia good illustrations.
FIFTY POUND PRIZE TALE.
Tim's Troubles; or, Tried and
True. By M. A. Pavitt. With
Five Engravings. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 3s. 6d.
A prize temperance tale for young per-
sons, the hero an Irish boy, who owes
everything in after life to having joined
a Band of Hope in boyhvod.
FIFTY POUND PRIZE TALE.
Lionel Franklin’s Victory. By E.
Van Sommer. With Six En-
gravings. Post Svo, cloth extra.
Price 3s. 6d.
An interesting prize temperance tale
for the young, with illustrative engrav-
ings.
SEVENTY POUND PRIZE TALE.
The Naresborough Victory. A
Story in Five Parts. By the Rev.
T. Keyworru, Author of ‘‘ Dick
the Newsboy,†‘Green and Grey,â€
etc., etc. With Illustrations.
Post 8vo, cloth extra. 2s. 6d.
“Tn construction the story is good, in
style it is excellent, and it ts certain to
be a general favourite.†MANCHESTER
EXAMINER.
“ Attractive in its incidents and forci-
ble in its lessons.â€â€”LIVERPOOL ALBION,
SPECIAL PRIZE TALE,
Owen’s Hobby; or, Strength in
Weakness. A Tale. By ELMER
BurieicH. Illustrated. Post
8vo, cloth extra. Price 2s. 6d.
Replete with touching, often saddening,
and frequently amusing incidents.
SPECIAL PRIZE TALE.
Every-Day Doings. By HeniEena
Ricuarpson. With Six Illustra
tions. Post Svo, cloth extra.
Price 2s. 6d.
A prize temperance tale, “written for
an earnest purpose,†and consisting
almost entirely of facts.
By Uphill Paths ; or, Waiting and
Winning. A Story of Work to
be Done. By E. Van Sommer,
Author of ‘Lionel Franklin’s
Victory.†Post 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 2s. 6d.
True to His Colours ; or, The Life
that Wears Best. By the Rev.
T. P. Wiisoxn, M.A., Vicar of
Pavenham, Author of ‘Frank
Oldfield,†etc. With Six En-
gravings. Post 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 3s. 6d.
An interesting tale—the scene laid in
England—illustrating the influence over
others for good of one consistent Christian
man and temperance advocate.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
Books for the Home Circle.
Favourite Narratives forthe Chris-
tian Household. Containing—
THE SHEPHERD oF SALISBURY
Puan — Darryman’s DaucHTer
—Youne Corracer, etc. Post
8vo, cloth extra, Price 2s.
This is a suitable book to put into the
hands of Sunday-school scholars.
Home for the Holidays. By Mrs.
C. C. Campset, Author of ‘‘Nat-
ural History for Young Folks,â€
ete. With 20 Illustrations. Post
8vo, cloth extra. Price 2s.
An attractive book for children, which,
along with a simple narrative, includes
some interesting facts of natural science,
historical legends, ete.
The King’s Highway; or, Illus-
trations of the Commandments.
By Rev. Ricuarp Newron, D.D.
Withnumerous Engravings. Post
8vo, cloth extra. Price 2s.
Addresses for the young on each Com-
mandment, with illustrative anecdotes
and hymns.
Going on Pilgrimage, A Com-
panion to the “ Pilgrim’s Pro-
gress,†for Young Pilgrims. By
Lucey Tayton, Author of “The
Children’s Champion, and the
Victories He Won.†Post 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 2s,
An outline, with running comments
and moral reflections, of the ‘ Pilgrim's
Progress,†designed to imbue the minds
of the young with the lofty aims of John
Bunyan in writing his unique allegory.
Quadrupeds. A Book of Zoology
for Boys. By Captain Mayne
Rew. With 25 Full-page IIlus-
trations. Post 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 2s,
The sketches are purely of a popular
character, even the scientific nomencla-
twre being avoided. Tt is hoped, however,
that they may prove of service to the
zoological tyro, and form, as it were, his
Jirst stepping-stone to a higher order of
classification.
Tales for the Home Circle.
Seed-Time and Harvest ; or, Sow
Well and Reap Well. A Book
for the Young. By the late Rev.
W. K. Tweepir, D.D. Post Svo,
cloth extra. Price Qs.
The book is eminently a practical one.
It shows the reader, by illustration and
example, the necessary results of good
and bad conduct, and invites him to
choose the right course.
The Children’s Champion, and
the Victories He Won. Pictures
from the Life of “The Good
Karl,†Lord Shaftesbury. By
Miss Lucy Taytor. Post 8vo,
cloth extra, Price 2s.
The Story of a Happy Home;
or, The Children’s Year, and How
They SpentIt. By Mary Howrrr.
Post 8vo, cloth extra. Price Qs.
The home of Herbert and Margaret,
near London; their garden birds, visit
to the country, to the sea-side, their Christ-
qmas-tree, ete,
By
Madame pe Wirt (née Guizot).
With 31 Illustrations. Post Svo,
cloth extra. Price 2s,
These tales, which are adapted from
the French, all imply or convey, without
preaching, a valuable moral, the more
likely to be remembered from the delicacy
with which tt is impressed upon the mind.
The illustrations are by M. Alfred de
Newville.
Seeking a Country; or, The Home
of the Pilgrims. By the Rev.
KE. N. Hoarz, M.A., Rector of
Acrise, Kent; Author of ‘‘ Hevo-
ism in Humble Life,†‘‘ Roe Car-
son’s Enemy,†etc. Post 8vo,
cloth extra, Price 2s.
An historical tale, founded on the first
voyage of the “‘ Mayflower,†and early ex-
periences of the Pilgrim Fathers. With
a portrait of Captain Miles Standish,
and many other interesting illustra-
tions.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
Good Purpose Tales and Stories.
What shall I be? or, A Boy’s
Aim in Life. With Frontispiece
and Vignette. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 2s.
A tale for the young. The good results
of good home example and training ap-
pearing in the end, after discipline and
Sailings.
At the Black Rocks. A Story for
Boys. By the Rev. Epwarp A.
Rann, Author of ‘‘ Margie at the
Harbour Light,†etc. Post 8vo,
cloth extra. Price 2s.
A story the leading characters of which
are two youths. One is always full of
great schemes, which invariably end in
smoke, and often bring their author into
trouble and humiliation; wlrile the other,
a simple, unassuming lad, says little,
but always does exactly what is needed,
and earns general respect and confidence.
The Phantom Picture. By the
Hon. Mrs. Gremnz, Author of
“The Grey House on the Hill,â€
“On Angels’ Wings,†etc. With
Illustrations. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 2s.
A story of two brothers and the misery
brought upon both by one af them dés-
obeying a command of their father. The
innocent boy is for a while suspected and
made unhappy in consequence; but at
last truth prevails and all ends well.
Archie Digby; or, An Eton Boy’s
Holidays. By G. E. W., Author
of ‘‘ Harry Bertram and his Kighth
Birthday.†Post 8vo, cl. ex. 2s.
A very interesting tale for boys. The
hero, a clever, thoughtless young Etonian,
learns during a Christmas holiday time,
by humbling experience, lessons full of
value for all after life.
Rhoda’s Reform; or, ‘‘Owe no
Man Anything.†By M. A.
Pavitt, Author of ‘ Tim’s
Troubles,†‘The Children’s
Tour,†etc. Post Svo, cloth
extra. Price 2s.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON
Martin’s Inheritance; or, The
Story of a Life’s Chances. A
Temperance Tale. By E, Van
Sommer, Author of ‘ Lionel
Franklin’s Victory,†‘‘By Uphill
Paths,†etc. Post 8vo, cloth
extra. Price 2s.
True Riches; or, Wealth Without
Wings. By T.S. Arruur. I]-
lustrated. Post 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 2s.
Teaches lessons such as cannot be
learned too early by those who are engaged
in the active and all-absorbing duties of
life.
Culm Rock; or, Ready Work for
Willing Hands. A Book for Boys.
By J. W. Brapiey. Foolscap
8vo. With Engravings. 2s.
Tt narrates the experiences and adven-
tures of a boy compelled by circumstances
toahard life on a stern and stormy coast.
After Years. A Story of Trials
and Triumphs. By the Author
of, and forming a Sequel to,
“Culm Rock.†With Ilustra-
tions. Foolscap 8vo, cloth extra.
Price 2s.
An American tale, the sequel to “Culm
Rock,†showing how well Nell Trafford,
in after years, fulfilled the fair promise
of his carly boyhood.
Conquest and Self-Conquest ; or,
Which Makes the Hero? Fools-
cap 8vo. Price 2s.
A tale very suitable for a lad under
Jifteen. It teaches the important lesson
that the greatest of victories is the victory
gained over self.
Home Principles in Boyhood.
Foolscap 8vo, cloth extra. 2s.
The story of a lad who, in spite of
apparent self-interest to the contrary,
held firmly to the principles in which
he had been instructed by Christian
parents.
EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK,
Illustrated Books for the Young.
The Children’s Tour; or, Every-
day Sights in a Sunny Land. By
M. A. Pautu, Author of ‘‘ Tim’s
Troubles,†‘The Meadows Fam-
ily.†With numerous Ilustra-
tions. Small 4to, cloth extra,
gilt edges. Price 5s.
A book for children, describing scenery
and adventures during a tour in Italy,
taken by w family party,—the health of
the eldest girl requiring a winter in the
south. Much useful information is plea-
santly given for young readers.
The Sea and its Wonders. By
Mary and Enizaprtma Kirey.
With 174 Illustrations. Small
4to, cloth extra, gilt edges. Price
5s. Cheaper Edition, 3s. 6d.
A book for the young, not strictly scten-
tific, but giving in a conversational style
much varied information regarding the
sea, its plants and living inhabitants,
with all sorts of illustrative engravings.
The World at Home. Pictures
and Scenes from Far-off Lands.
By M. and E. Kirpy. With 100
Engravings. Small 4to, cloth
extra, gilt edges. Price 5s.
Cheaper Edition, 3s. Gd.
A book for the young, containing, in a
number of short conversational sections,
a great variety of geographical informa-
tion, facts of natural history, and per-
sonal adventure; intended to bring the
world, so full of wonders, to our own
Jiresidcs. The whole is profusely illus-
trated.
Bible Stories Simply Told. By
M. EB. Ciuements, Author of ‘The
Story of the Beacon Fire,†etc.
Small 4to, cloth extra, gilt edges.
With numerous Illustrations. 5s.
Cheaper Edition, 3s. 6d.
In this elegant volume we have stories
from the Old Testament told in simple
language for young people. It is divided
into three sections:—I. About the Qld
World. II. The Patriarchs. III. The
Rescue from Egypt.
T. NELSON AND SONS, LONDON,
Natural History for Young Folks.
By Mrs. C. C. Campprntn. With
56 Illustrations by GracomELut.
In elegant binding. Post 8vo,
cloth extra, gold and colours.
Price 3s. 6d.
“Evidently the result of years of re
search on the part of the author, Mrs. C.
C. Campbell. Her object has been to
simplify the more scientific side of the
subject, and ‘to explain how the different
orders of animals, from man, the highest,
down to the duck-billed platypus, re-
semble one another.’ The book is thor-
oughly entertaining.†—Sarurpay Rx-
VIEW.
Pets and Playfellows ; or, Stories
about Cats and Dogs. By Mrs.
Sure. With Twenty-four Illus-
trations. Small 4to, cloth extra.
Price 3s. 6d.
A rich store of interest and amuse-
ment for young people, who will jind
their knowledge and love of animals in-
creased by its perusal.
The Stories of the Trees. Talks
with the Children. By Mrs. W.
H. Dyson, Author of ‘‘ Children’s
Flowers,†‘‘ Apples and Oranges,â€
etc. With Illustrations. Post
8vo, cloth extra. Price 3s. 6d.
“Well suited, by its pleasant, chatty
style, to interest young people.†—SaTUR-
DAY REVIEW.
Royal Portrait Gallery. With
numerous Illustrations. Small
4to, cloth extra. Price 3s. 6d.
In this volume our kings and queens
are described with pen and pencil in a
way that is sure to delight and instruct
young readers.
Pictures and Stories from English
History. With numerous Illus-
trations. Small 4to, cloth extra.
Price 3s. 6d.
The stories are told in a lively and
attractive style, and cannot fail to create
in the young aw liking for the study of
history.
EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK.
4
rs
Ge
ase
L
Za
220 5%
3 =u) O
Eo ye ag
comm
Ban OF
tH Ot?
fe a: Se a se eenees